Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 30152:f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
displaying a message instead of the minibuffer contents.
(row_equal_p): Add parameter MOUSE_FACE_P. If set,
compare the mouse_face_p flags of both rows.
author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Tue, 11 Jul 2000 19:57:54 +0000 |
parents | b20d72b7aa4b |
children | 8be2bf27e9ad |
rev | line source |
---|---|
314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 1999 |
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
314 | 4 |
5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
6 | |
7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
314 | 10 any later version. |
11 | |
12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
16 | |
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
314 | 21 |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
22 #include <config.h> |
314 | 23 #include <signal.h> |
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
26 | |
21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
28 #include <unistd.h> | |
29 #endif | |
30 | |
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
33 #include "termopts.h" | |
2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
764 | 40 #include "frame.h" |
314 | 41 #include "window.h" |
42 #include "commands.h" | |
43 #include "disptab.h" | |
44 #include "indent.h" | |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
45 #include "intervals.h" |
15065 | 46 #include "blockinput.h" |
21514 | 47 #include "process.h" |
48 #include "keyboard.h" | |
314 | 49 |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
554 | 54 |
314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
56 #include "xterm.h" | |
25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
314 | 58 |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
25012 | 63 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
64 | |
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
65 #include "systime.h" |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
66 #include <errno.h> |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
67 |
25012 | 68 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
69 | |
70 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
71 #include <unistd.h> | |
72 #endif | |
73 | |
314 | 74 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
75 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
76 | |
77 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
25012 | 78 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
79 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
80 | |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
81 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
25012 | 82 |
83 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
84 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
85 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
86 | |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
87 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
88 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
89 #else |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
90 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
91 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #endif |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
94 #if !defined (PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) && HAVE_STDIO_EXT_H && HAVE___FPENDING |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
95 #include <stdio_ext.h> |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
96 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) __fpending (FILE) |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
97 #endif |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
98 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
314 | 99 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
100 #endif | |
25012 | 101 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
102 | |
29437 | 103 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
104 #include <term.h> /* for tgetent */ | |
105 #endif | |
25012 | 106 |
107 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
108 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
109 | |
110 struct dim | |
111 { | |
112 int width; | |
113 int height; | |
114 }; | |
115 | |
116 | |
117 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
118 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
119 static void redraw_overlapping_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
120 static void redraw_overlapped_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 121 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); |
122 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
123 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
124 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
125 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
126 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
127 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
128 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
129 struct dim)); | |
130 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
131 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
132 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
133 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
134 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
135 int, int, struct dim)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
136 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int, int)); |
25012 | 137 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
138 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
139 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
140 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
141 struct window *)); | |
142 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
143 struct window *)); | |
144 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
145 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
146 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
147 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
148 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
149 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
150 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
151 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
152 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
153 int, int)); | |
154 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
155 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
156 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
157 static int update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 158 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
159 static int update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 160 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, |
161 int)); | |
162 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
163 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
164 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 165 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, |
166 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
167 #endif |
25012 | 168 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); |
169 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
170 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
171 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
172 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
173 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
174 struct glyph_row *, int)); |
25012 | 175 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); |
176 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
177 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
178 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
179 static void sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows P_ ((struct window *)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
180 struct window *frame_row_to_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 181 |
182 | |
183 | |
184 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
185 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
186 scrolling. */ | |
187 | |
188 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
189 |
554 | 190 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
764 | 191 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
314 | 192 |
764 | 193 int frame_garbaged; |
314 | 194 |
25012 | 195 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
314 | 196 |
197 int display_completed; | |
198 | |
25012 | 199 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
200 audible bell. */ | |
314 | 201 |
202 int visible_bell; | |
203 | |
764 | 204 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
314 | 205 |
206 int inverse_video; | |
207 | |
208 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
209 | |
210 int baud_rate; | |
211 | |
25012 | 212 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
213 is running. */ | |
314 | 214 |
215 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
216 | |
217 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
25012 | 218 |
314 | 219 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
220 | |
25012 | 221 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
222 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
314 | 223 |
224 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
25012 | 225 as a character code. |
226 | |
227 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
228 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
314 | 229 |
230 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
231 | |
232 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
233 | |
234 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
235 | |
25012 | 236 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
237 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
238 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
239 | |
314 | 240 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
241 |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
242 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table; |
25012 | 243 |
314 | 244 |
25012 | 245 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
246 variable always equals the_only_frame. */ |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
247 |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
248 Lisp_Object selected_frame; |
25012 | 249 |
250 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
764 | 251 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
9572 | 252 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
253 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
25012 | 254 |
255 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
256 | |
257 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
258 | |
259 FILE *termscript; | |
260 | |
261 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
262 | |
263 struct cm Wcm; | |
264 | |
265 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
266 | |
267 int delayed_size_change; | |
268 | |
269 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
270 | |
271 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
272 | |
273 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
274 | |
275 struct window *updated_window; | |
276 | |
277 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
278 | |
279 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
280 int updated_area; | |
281 | |
282 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
283 | |
284 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
285 | |
286 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
287 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
288 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
289 | |
290 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
291 | |
292 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
293 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
294 | |
295 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
296 int glyph_pool_count; | |
297 | |
298 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
299 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
300 | |
301 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
302 | |
303 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
304 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
305 | |
306 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
307 | |
308 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
309 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
310 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
311 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
312 loaded on demand. */ | |
313 | |
314 int fonts_changed_p; | |
315 | |
316 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
317 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
318 | |
319 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
320 | |
321 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
322 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
323 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
324 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
325 | |
326 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
327 | |
328 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
329 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
330 | |
331 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
332 | |
333 | |
334 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
335 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
336 address of this function is used. */ | |
314 | 337 |
338 void | |
339 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
340 char *from, *to; | |
341 int size; | |
342 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
343 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
314 | 344 return; |
345 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
346 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
347 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
348 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
349 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
350 bcopy (from, to, size); |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
351 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
352 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
353 else |
314 | 354 { |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
355 register char *endf = from + size; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
356 register char *endt = to + size; |
314 | 357 |
358 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
359 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
360 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
361 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
362 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
363 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
314 | 364 if (to - from < 64) |
365 { | |
366 do | |
367 *--endt = *--endf; | |
368 while (endf != from); | |
369 } | |
370 else | |
371 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
372 for (;;) |
314 | 373 { |
374 endt -= (to - from); | |
375 endf -= (to - from); | |
376 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
377 if (endt < to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
378 break; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
379 |
314 | 380 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
381 } | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
382 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
383 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
25012 | 384 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
385 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
314 | 386 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
387 } | |
388 } | |
389 } | |
390 | |
25012 | 391 |
392 | |
393 /*********************************************************************** | |
394 Glyph Matrices | |
395 ***********************************************************************/ | |
396 | |
397 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
398 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
399 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
400 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
401 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
402 | |
403 struct glyph_matrix * | |
404 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
405 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
406 { | |
407 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
408 | |
409 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
410 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
411 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
412 | |
413 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
414 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
415 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
416 | |
417 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
418 result->pool = pool; | |
419 return result; | |
420 } | |
421 | |
422 | |
423 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
424 | |
425 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
426 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
427 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
428 pointer was passed to this function. | |
429 | |
430 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
431 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
432 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
433 | |
434 static void | |
435 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
436 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
437 { | |
438 if (matrix) | |
439 { | |
440 int i; | |
441 | |
442 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
443 allocated. */ | |
444 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
445 abort (); | |
446 | |
447 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
448 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
449 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
450 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
451 | |
452 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
453 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
454 xfree (matrix); | |
455 } | |
456 } | |
457 | |
458 | |
459 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
460 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
461 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
462 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
463 or a float. */ | |
464 | |
465 static int | |
466 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
467 struct window *w; | |
468 int total_glyphs; | |
469 Lisp_Object margin; | |
470 { | |
471 int n; | |
472 | |
473 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
474 { | |
475 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
476 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
477 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
478 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
479 } | |
480 else | |
481 n = 0; | |
482 | |
483 return n; | |
484 } | |
485 | |
486 | |
487 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
488 window sizes. | |
489 | |
490 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
491 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
492 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
493 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
494 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
495 | |
496 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
497 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
498 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
499 MATRIX->pool. | |
500 | |
501 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
502 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
503 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
504 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
505 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
506 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
507 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
508 | |
509 static void | |
510 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
511 struct window *w; | |
512 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
513 int x, y; | |
514 struct dim dim; | |
515 { | |
516 int i; | |
517 int new_rows; | |
518 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
25546 | 519 int header_line_changed_p = 0; |
520 int header_line_p = 0; | |
25012 | 521 int left = -1, right = -1; |
522 int window_x, window_y, window_width, window_height; | |
523 | |
524 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
525 if (w) | |
526 { | |
25546 | 527 header_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_HEADER_LINE_P (w); |
528 header_line_changed_p = header_line_p != matrix->header_line_p; | |
25012 | 529 } |
25546 | 530 matrix->header_line_p = header_line_p; |
25012 | 531 |
532 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
533 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
534 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
535 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
536 { | |
537 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
538 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
539 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
540 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
541 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
542 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
543 | |
544 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
545 && !fonts_changed_p | |
25546 | 546 && !header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 547 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) |
548 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
549 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
550 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
551 return; | |
552 } | |
553 | |
554 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
555 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
556 { | |
557 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
558 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
559 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
560 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
561 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
562 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
563 } | |
564 else | |
565 new_rows = 0; | |
566 | |
567 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
568 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
569 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
570 if (matrix->pool) | |
571 { | |
572 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
573 | |
574 if (w) | |
575 { | |
576 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
577 w->left_margin_width); | |
578 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
579 w->right_margin_width); | |
580 } | |
581 else | |
582 left = right = 0; | |
583 | |
584 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
585 { | |
586 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
587 | |
588 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
589 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
590 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
591 + x); | |
592 | |
593 if (w == NULL | |
594 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 595 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 596 { |
597 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
598 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
599 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
600 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
601 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
602 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
603 } | |
604 else | |
605 { | |
606 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
607 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
608 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
609 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
610 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
611 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
612 } | |
613 } | |
614 | |
615 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
616 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
617 } | |
618 else | |
619 { | |
620 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
621 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
622 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
623 || new_rows | |
25546 | 624 || header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 625 || marginal_areas_changed_p) |
626 { | |
627 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
628 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
629 | |
630 while (row < end) | |
631 { | |
632 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
633 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
634 (dim.width | |
635 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
636 | |
637 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
638 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 639 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 640 { |
641 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
642 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
643 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
644 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
645 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
646 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
647 } | |
648 else | |
649 { | |
650 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
651 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
652 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
653 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
654 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
655 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
656 } | |
657 ++row; | |
658 } | |
659 } | |
660 | |
661 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
662 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
663 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
664 } | |
665 | |
666 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
667 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
668 | |
669 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
670 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
671 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
672 when this function runs. */ | |
673 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
674 { | |
675 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, | |
676 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
677 of the window. */ | |
678 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
679 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
680 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
681 { | |
682 i = 0; | |
683 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
684 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
685 < matrix->window_height)) | |
686 ++i; | |
687 | |
688 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
689 are invalidated. */ | |
690 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
691 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
692 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
693 | |
694 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
695 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
696 } | |
697 else | |
698 { | |
699 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
700 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
701 } | |
702 } | |
703 | |
704 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
705 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
706 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
707 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
708 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
709 | |
710 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
711 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
712 if (w) | |
713 { | |
714 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); | |
715 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
716 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
717 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
718 } | |
719 } | |
720 | |
721 | |
722 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
723 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
724 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
725 below). */ | |
314 | 726 |
727 static void | |
25012 | 728 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
729 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
730 int start, end; | |
314 | 731 { |
25012 | 732 int i, j; |
733 | |
734 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
735 { | |
736 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
737 initialization. */ | |
738 struct glyph_row temp; | |
739 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
740 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
741 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
742 } | |
314 | 743 } |
744 | |
25012 | 745 |
746 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
747 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
748 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
749 row structures are moved around). | |
750 | |
751 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
752 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
753 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
754 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
755 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
756 rotating right. */ | |
757 | |
758 void | |
759 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
760 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
761 int first, last, by; | |
314 | 762 { |
25012 | 763 if (by < 0) |
764 { | |
765 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
766 by = -by; | |
767 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
768 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
769 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
770 } | |
771 else if (by > 0) | |
314 | 772 { |
25012 | 773 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
774 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
775 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
776 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
314 | 777 } |
25012 | 778 } |
779 | |
780 | |
781 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
782 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
783 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
784 | |
785 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
786 increment_matrix_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 787 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; |
788 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
789 { | |
790 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
791 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
792 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
793 xassert (start <= end); | |
794 | |
795 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
796 increment_row_positions (matrix->rows + start, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 797 } |
798 | |
799 | |
800 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
801 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
802 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
803 | |
804 void | |
805 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
806 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
807 int start, end; | |
808 int enabled_p; | |
809 { | |
810 xassert (start <= end); | |
811 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
812 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
813 | |
814 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
815 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
816 } | |
817 | |
818 | |
819 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
820 | |
821 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
822 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
823 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
824 enabled_p flag. | |
825 | |
826 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
827 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
828 | |
829 void | |
830 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
831 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
832 { | |
833 if (matrix) | |
314 | 834 { |
25012 | 835 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
836 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
314 | 837 } |
838 } | |
25012 | 839 |
840 | |
841 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
842 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
843 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
844 | |
845 void | |
846 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
847 struct window *w; | |
848 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
849 int start, end, dy; | |
850 { | |
851 int min_y, max_y; | |
852 | |
853 xassert (start <= end); | |
854 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
855 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
856 | |
25546 | 857 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 858 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
859 | |
860 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
861 { | |
862 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
863 | |
864 row->y += dy; | |
865 | |
866 if (row->y < min_y) | |
867 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
868 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
869 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
870 else | |
871 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
872 } | |
873 } | |
874 | |
875 | |
876 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
877 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
878 current matrix. */ | |
879 | |
880 void | |
881 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
882 register struct frame *f; | |
883 { | |
884 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
885 if (f->current_matrix) | |
886 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
887 | |
888 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
889 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
890 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
891 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
892 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
893 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
894 /* Clear the matrix of the tool-bar window, if any. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
895 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
896 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->current_matrix); |
25012 | 897 |
898 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
899 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
900 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
901 } | |
902 | |
903 | |
904 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
314 | 905 |
21514 | 906 void |
25012 | 907 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
908 register struct frame *f; | |
314 | 909 { |
25012 | 910 if (f->desired_matrix) |
911 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
912 | |
913 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
914 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
915 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
916 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
917 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->desired_matrix); |
25012 | 918 |
919 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
920 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
921 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
922 } | |
923 | |
924 | |
925 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
926 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
927 | |
928 static void | |
929 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
930 struct window *w; | |
931 int desired_p; | |
932 { | |
933 while (w) | |
314 | 934 { |
25012 | 935 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
936 { | |
937 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
938 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
939 } | |
940 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
314 | 941 { |
25012 | 942 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
943 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
944 } | |
945 else | |
946 { | |
947 if (desired_p) | |
948 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
949 else | |
314 | 950 { |
25012 | 951 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
952 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
314 | 953 } |
25012 | 954 } |
955 | |
956 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
957 } | |
958 } | |
959 | |
960 | |
961 | |
962 /*********************************************************************** | |
963 Glyph Rows | |
964 | |
965 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
966 ***********************************************************************/ | |
967 | |
968 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
969 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
970 structure members. */ | |
971 | |
972 void | |
973 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
974 struct glyph_row *row; | |
975 { | |
976 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
977 static struct glyph_row null_row; | |
978 | |
979 /* Save pointers. */ | |
980 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
981 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
982 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
983 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
984 | |
985 /* Clear. */ | |
986 *row = null_row; | |
987 | |
988 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
989 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
990 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
991 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
992 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
30041
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
993 |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
994 #if 0 /* At some point, some bit-fields of struct glyph were not set, |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
995 which made glyphs unequal when compared with GLYPH_EQUAL_P. |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
996 Redisplay outputs such glyphs, and flickering effects were |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
997 the result. This also depended on the contents of memory |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
998 returned by xmalloc. If flickering happens again, activate |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
999 the code below If the flickering is gone with that, chances |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1000 are that the flickering has the same reason as here. */ |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1001 bzero (p[0], (char *) p[LAST_AREA] - (char *) p[0]); |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1002 #endif |
25012 | 1003 } |
1004 | |
1005 | |
1006 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
1007 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
1008 | |
1009 void | |
1010 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
1011 struct window *w; | |
1012 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1013 int y; | |
1014 { | |
1015 int min_y, max_y; | |
1016 | |
25546 | 1017 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 1018 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
1019 | |
1020 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1021 row->y = y; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1022 row->ascent = row->phys_ascent = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1023 row->height = row->phys_height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (w->frame)); |
25012 | 1024 |
1025 if (row->y < min_y) | |
1026 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
1027 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
1028 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
1029 else | |
1030 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
1031 | |
1032 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1033 } | |
1034 | |
1035 | |
1036 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
1037 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
1038 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
1039 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
1040 ends. */ | |
1041 | |
1042 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1043 increment_row_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 1044 struct glyph_row *row; |
1045 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1046 { | |
1047 int area, i; | |
1048 | |
1049 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
1050 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1051 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1052 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1053 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1054 | |
1055 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
1056 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1057 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
1058 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
1059 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
1060 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
1061 | |
1062 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
1063 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
1064 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1065 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
1066 } | |
1067 | |
1068 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1069 #if 0 |
25012 | 1070 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph |
1071 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
1072 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
1073 | |
1074 static void | |
1075 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
1076 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1077 { | |
1078 int area; | |
1079 | |
1080 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1081 { | |
1082 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
1083 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
1084 | |
1085 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1086 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1087 | |
1088 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1089 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
1090 | |
1091 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
1092 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1093 | |
1094 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
1095 { | |
1096 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
1097 initialization. */ | |
1098 struct glyph temp; | |
1099 temp = *glyph_a; | |
1100 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
1101 *glyph_b = temp; | |
1102 ++glyph_a; | |
1103 ++glyph_b; | |
314 | 1104 } |
1105 } | |
1106 } | |
25012 | 1107 |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1108 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1109 |
1110 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
1111 | |
1112 static INLINE void | |
1113 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
1114 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1115 { | |
1116 int i; | |
1117 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
1118 { | |
1119 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
1120 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
1121 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
1122 } | |
1123 } | |
1124 | |
1125 | |
1126 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
1127 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
1128 | |
1129 INLINE void | |
1130 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
1131 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1132 { | |
1133 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
1134 | |
1135 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
1136 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1137 | |
1138 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
1139 *to = *from; | |
1140 | |
1141 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
1142 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1143 } | |
1144 | |
1145 | |
1146 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
1147 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
1148 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
1149 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
1150 | |
1151 void | |
1152 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1153 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1154 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1155 { | |
1156 int area; | |
1157 | |
1158 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
1159 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
1160 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1161 | |
1162 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
1163 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1164 if (from->used[area]) | |
1165 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
1166 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
1167 | |
1168 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1169 increment_row_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 1170 } |
1171 | |
1172 | |
1173 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
1174 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
1175 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
1176 a memory leak. */ | |
1177 | |
1178 static INLINE void | |
1179 assign_row (to, from) | |
1180 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1181 { | |
1182 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
1183 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1184 } | |
1185 | |
1186 | |
1187 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
1188 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
1189 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
1190 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
1191 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
1192 | |
1193 static int | |
1194 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
1195 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
1196 { | |
1197 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1198 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1199 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
1200 | |
1201 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
1202 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
1203 } | |
1204 | |
1205 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1206 #if 0 |
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1207 |
25012 | 1208 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice |
1209 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
1210 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
1211 | |
1212 static struct glyph_row * | |
1213 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
1214 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
1215 int row; | |
1216 { | |
1217 int i; | |
1218 | |
1219 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
1220 | |
1221 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1222 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
1223 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
1224 break; | |
1225 | |
1226 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
1227 } | |
1228 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1229 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1230 |
1231 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
1232 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
1233 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
1234 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
1235 | |
1236 void | |
1237 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
1238 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1239 { | |
1240 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
1241 { | |
1242 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1243 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1244 } | |
1245 } | |
1246 | |
1247 | |
1248 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
1249 | |
1250 int | |
1251 line_hash_code (row) | |
1252 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1253 { | |
1254 int hash = 0; | |
1255 | |
1256 if (row->enabled_p) | |
1257 { | |
1258 if (row->inverse_p) | |
1259 { | |
1260 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
1261 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
1262 hash = -1; | |
1263 } | |
1264 else | |
1265 { | |
1266 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1267 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1268 | |
1269 while (glyph < end) | |
1270 { | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1271 int c = glyph->u.ch; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1272 int face_id = glyph->face_id; |
25012 | 1273 if (must_write_spaces) |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1274 c -= SPACEGLYPH; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1275 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + c; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1276 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + face_id; |
25012 | 1277 ++glyph; |
1278 } | |
1279 | |
1280 if (hash == 0) | |
1281 hash = 1; | |
1282 } | |
1283 } | |
1284 | |
1285 return hash; | |
1286 } | |
1287 | |
1288 | |
1289 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
1290 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
1291 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
1292 | |
1293 static unsigned int | |
1294 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
1295 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1296 int vpos; | |
1297 { | |
1298 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
1299 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1300 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1301 int len; | |
1302 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
1303 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
1304 | |
1305 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
1306 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
1307 { | |
1308 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
1309 while (end != beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*end)) | |
1310 --end; | |
1311 | |
1312 /* All blank line. */ | |
1313 if (end == beg) | |
1314 return 0; | |
1315 | |
1316 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
1317 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
1318 ++beg; | |
1319 } | |
1320 | |
1321 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
1322 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
1323 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
1324 len = end - beg; | |
1325 else | |
1326 { | |
1327 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
1328 in LEN. */ | |
1329 len = 0; | |
1330 while (beg < end) | |
1331 { | |
1332 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
1333 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1334 if (g < 0 |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1335 || GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) |
25012 | 1336 len += 1; |
1337 else | |
1338 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
1339 | |
1340 ++beg; | |
1341 } | |
1342 } | |
1343 | |
1344 return len; | |
1345 } | |
1346 | |
1347 | |
1348 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
1349 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
1350 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1351 visibility. MOUSE_FACE_P non-zero means compare the mouse_face_p |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1352 flags of A and B, too. */ |
25012 | 1353 |
1354 static INLINE int | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1355 row_equal_p (w, a, b, mouse_face_p) |
25012 | 1356 struct window *w; |
1357 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1358 int mouse_face_p; |
25012 | 1359 { |
1360 if (a == b) | |
1361 return 1; | |
1362 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
1363 return 0; | |
1364 else | |
1365 { | |
1366 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
1367 int area; | |
1368 | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1369 if (mouse_face_p && a->mouse_face_p != b->mouse_face_p) |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1370 return 0; |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1371 |
25012 | 1372 /* Compare glyphs. */ |
1373 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1374 { | |
1375 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
1376 return 0; | |
1377 | |
1378 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1379 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
1380 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1381 | |
1382 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
1383 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
1384 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
1385 | |
1386 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
1387 return 0; | |
1388 } | |
1389 | |
1390 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
1391 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
1392 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
1393 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
1394 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
1395 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
1396 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1397 || a->overlapped_p != b->overlapped_p |
25012 | 1398 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) |
1399 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
1400 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
1401 || a->x != b->x | |
1402 /* Different height. */ | |
1403 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1404 || a->phys_ascent != b->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1405 || a->phys_height != b->phys_height |
25012 | 1406 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) |
1407 return 0; | |
1408 } | |
1409 | |
1410 return 1; | |
1411 } | |
1412 | |
1413 | |
314 | 1414 |
25012 | 1415 /*********************************************************************** |
1416 Glyph Pool | |
1417 | |
1418 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
1419 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1420 | |
1421 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
1422 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1423 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
1424 | |
1425 static struct glyph_pool * | |
1426 new_glyph_pool () | |
1427 { | |
1428 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
1429 | |
1430 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
1431 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
1432 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
1433 | |
1434 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
1435 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
1436 | |
1437 return result; | |
1438 } | |
1439 | |
1440 | |
1441 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
1442 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1443 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
1444 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
1445 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
1446 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
1447 | |
1448 static void | |
1449 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
1450 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1451 { | |
1452 if (pool) | |
1453 { | |
1454 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
1455 --glyph_pool_count; | |
1456 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
1457 | |
1458 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
1459 xfree (pool); | |
1460 } | |
1461 } | |
1462 | |
1463 | |
1464 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
1465 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
1466 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
1467 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
1468 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
1469 | |
1470 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
1471 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
1472 | |
1473 static int | |
1474 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
1475 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1476 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1477 { | |
1478 int needed; | |
1479 int changed_p; | |
1480 | |
1481 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
1482 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
1483 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
1484 | |
1485 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
1486 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
1487 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
1488 { | |
1489 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
1490 | |
1491 if (pool->glyphs) | |
1492 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1493 else | |
1494 { | |
1495 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
1496 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1497 } | |
1498 | |
1499 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
1500 } | |
1501 | |
1502 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
1503 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
1504 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
1505 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
1506 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
1507 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
1508 | |
1509 return changed_p; | |
1510 } | |
1511 | |
1512 | |
1513 | |
1514 /*********************************************************************** | |
1515 Debug Code | |
1516 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1517 | |
1518 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
1519 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1520 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1521 /* Flush standard output. This is sometimes useful to call from |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1522 the debugger. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1523 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1524 void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1525 flush_stdout () |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1526 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1527 fflush (stdout); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1528 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1529 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1530 |
25012 | 1531 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a |
1532 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
1533 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
1534 MATRIX. */ | |
1535 | |
1536 void | |
1537 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
1538 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1539 { | |
1540 int i, j; | |
1541 | |
1542 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1543 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
1544 xassert (i == j | |
1545 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
1546 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
1547 } | |
1548 | |
1549 | |
1550 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
1551 | |
1552 struct glyph_row * | |
1553 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
1554 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1555 int row; | |
1556 { | |
1557 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
1558 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
1559 | |
1560 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
1561 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
1562 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
314 | 1563 #if 0 |
25012 | 1564 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
1565 #endif | |
1566 | |
1567 return matrix->rows + row; | |
1568 } | |
1569 | |
1570 | |
1571 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
1572 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
1573 nevertheless. */ | |
1574 | |
1575 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
1576 window W. */ | |
1577 | |
1578 static void | |
1579 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
314 | 1580 struct window *w; |
1581 { | |
25012 | 1582 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
1583 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
1584 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
1585 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
1586 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
1587 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
1588 int c; | |
1589 | |
1590 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
1591 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
1592 return; | |
1593 | |
1594 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
1595 | |
1596 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
1597 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
1598 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
1599 { | |
1600 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
1601 | |
1602 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1603 last_text_row = row; | |
1604 | |
1605 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
1606 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1607 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1608 | |
1609 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
1610 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
1611 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
1612 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
1613 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1614 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1615 | |
1616 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
1617 of next row. */ | |
1618 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
1619 { | |
1620 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
1621 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
1622 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1623 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
1624 } | |
1625 row = next; | |
1626 } | |
1627 | |
1628 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
1629 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
1630 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
1631 } | |
1632 | |
1633 #endif /* 0 */ | |
1634 | |
1635 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
1636 | |
1637 | |
1638 | |
1639 /********************************************************************** | |
1640 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
1641 **********************************************************************/ | |
1642 | |
1643 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
1644 redisplay | |
1645 | |
1646 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
1647 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
1648 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
1649 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
1650 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
1651 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
1652 performed. | |
1653 | |
1654 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
1655 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
1656 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
1657 | |
1658 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
1659 | |
1660 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
1661 glyph matrices yet, and | |
1662 | |
1663 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
1664 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
1665 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
1666 | |
1667 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
1668 function. | |
1669 | |
1670 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
1671 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
1672 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
1673 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
1674 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
1675 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
1676 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
1677 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
1678 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
1679 | |
1680 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
1681 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
1682 necessary. | |
1683 | |
1684 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
1685 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
1686 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
1687 windows in the sequence. | |
1688 | |
1689 |<------- result width ------->| | |
1690 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
1691 | | | | | | |
1692 | | | | | |
1693 +---------+ | | result height | |
1694 | +---------+ | |
1695 | | | | |
1696 +----------+ --- | |
1697 | |
1698 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
1699 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
1700 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
1701 | |
1702 |<---- result width -->| | |
1703 +---------+ --- | |
1704 | | | | |
1705 | | | | |
1706 +---------+--+ | | |
1707 | | | | |
1708 | | result height | |
1709 | | | |
1710 +------------+---------+ | | |
1711 | | | | |
1712 | | | | |
1713 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
1714 | |
1715 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
1716 allocated. */ | |
1717 | |
1718 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
1719 | |
1720 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
1721 size. */ | |
1722 | |
1723 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
1724 | |
1725 static struct dim | |
1726 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1727 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
1728 Lisp_Object window; | |
1729 int x, y; | |
1730 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1731 int dim_only_p; | |
1732 int *window_change_flags; | |
1733 { | |
1734 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
1735 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
1736 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
1737 struct dim total; | |
1738 struct dim dim; | |
1739 struct window *w; | |
1740 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
1741 | |
1742 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
1743 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
1744 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
1745 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
1746 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
1747 vertically below other windows. */ | |
1748 in_horz_combination_p | |
1749 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
1750 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
1751 | |
1752 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
1753 do | |
1754 { | |
1755 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
1756 | |
1757 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
1758 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
1759 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1760 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1761 dim_only_p, | |
1762 window_change_flags); | |
1763 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
1764 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1765 dim_only_p, | |
1766 window_change_flags); | |
1767 else | |
1768 { | |
1769 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
1770 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1771 { | |
1772 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1773 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1774 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1775 } | |
1776 | |
1777 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
1778 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1779 dim.width = XINT (w->width); |
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1780 dim.height = XINT (w->height); |
25012 | 1781 |
1782 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
1783 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
1784 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
1785 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
1786 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
1787 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1788 w->right_margin_width) | |
1789 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
1790 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1791 w->left_margin_width) | |
1792 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
1793 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1794 | |
1795 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
1796 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
1797 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
1798 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
1799 necessary. */ | |
1800 if (!dim_only_p) | |
1801 { | |
1802 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1803 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1804 } | |
1805 } | |
1806 | |
1807 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
1808 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
1809 below W. */ | |
1810 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1811 x += dim.width; | |
1812 else | |
1813 y += dim.height; | |
1814 | |
1815 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
1816 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
1817 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
1818 | |
1819 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
1820 window = w->next; | |
1821 } | |
1822 while (!NILP (window)); | |
1823 | |
1824 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
1825 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
1826 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
1827 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
1828 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
1829 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
1830 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1831 { | |
1832 total.width = x - x0; | |
1833 total.height = hmax; | |
1834 } | |
1835 else | |
1836 { | |
1837 total.width = wmax; | |
1838 total.height = y - y0; | |
1839 } | |
1840 | |
1841 return total; | |
1842 } | |
1843 | |
1844 | |
1845 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
1846 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
1847 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
1848 | |
1849 static void | |
1850 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
1851 struct window *w; | |
1852 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1853 { | |
1854 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
1855 | |
1856 while (w) | |
314 | 1857 { |
25012 | 1858 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
1859 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
1860 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1861 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
1862 else | |
314 | 1863 { |
25012 | 1864 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
1865 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
1866 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
1867 struct dim dim; | |
1868 | |
1869 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
1870 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
314 | 1871 { |
25012 | 1872 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
1873 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
314 | 1874 } |
25012 | 1875 |
1876 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
1877 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
1878 / ch_dim.width) | |
1879 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
1880 + 2 | |
1881 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
1882 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
1883 + 1 + 1); | |
1884 | |
1885 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
1886 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
1887 / ch_dim.height) | |
1888 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
1889 bottom of the window. */ | |
1890 + 2 | |
1891 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
1892 + 2); | |
1893 | |
1894 /* Change matrices. */ | |
1895 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1896 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1897 } | |
1898 | |
1899 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
1900 } | |
1901 } | |
1902 | |
1903 | |
1904 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
1905 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
1906 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
1907 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
1908 | |
1909 void | |
1910 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
1911 struct frame *f; | |
1912 { | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1913 /* Block input so that expose events and other events that access |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1914 glyph matrices are not processed while we are changing them. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1915 BLOCK_INPUT; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1916 |
25012 | 1917 if (f) |
1918 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
1919 else | |
1920 { | |
1921 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
1922 | |
1923 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
1924 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
1925 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1926 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1927 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 1928 } |
1929 | |
1930 | |
1931 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
1932 | |
1933 To be called from init_display. | |
1934 | |
1935 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
1936 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
1937 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
1938 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
1939 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
1940 windows to estimated values. */ | |
1941 | |
1942 static void | |
1943 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
1944 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1945 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1946 struct window *root = XWINDOW (sf->root_window); |
25012 | 1947 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1948 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1949 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1950 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (sf); |
25012 | 1951 |
1952 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
1953 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
1954 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1955 set_window_height (sf->root_window, frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); |
25012 | 1956 |
1957 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
1958 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
1959 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
1960 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
1961 | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1962 adjust_frame_glyphs (sf); |
25012 | 1963 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; |
1964 } | |
1965 | |
1966 | |
1967 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
1968 | |
1969 static void | |
1970 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
1971 struct frame *f; | |
1972 { | |
1973 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
1974 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
1975 else | |
1976 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
1977 | |
1978 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
1979 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
1980 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
1981 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
1982 | |
1983 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
1984 } | |
1985 | |
1986 | |
1987 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
1988 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
1989 | |
1990 static void | |
1991 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
1992 struct frame *f; | |
1993 { | |
1994 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1995 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1996 int pool_changed_p; | |
1997 int window_change_flags; | |
1998 int top_window_y; | |
1999 | |
2000 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
2001 return; | |
2002 | |
2003 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
2004 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
2005 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2006 | |
2007 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
2008 | |
2009 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
2010 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
2011 { | |
2012 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
2013 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
2014 } | |
2015 | |
2016 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
2017 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
2018 { | |
2019 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
2020 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
2021 } | |
2022 | |
2023 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
2024 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
2025 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
2026 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
2027 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
2028 matrix. */ | |
2029 window_change_flags = 0; | |
2030 matrix_dim | |
2031 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2032 0, top_window_y, | |
2033 ch_dim, 1, | |
2034 &window_change_flags); | |
2035 | |
2036 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
2037 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
2038 | |
2039 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
2040 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2041 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2042 | |
2043 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
2044 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
2045 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
2046 { | |
2047 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
2048 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2049 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
2050 &window_change_flags); | |
2051 | |
2052 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
2053 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
2054 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
2055 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
2056 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2057 | |
2058 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
2059 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2060 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2061 | |
2062 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
2063 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
2064 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
2065 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
2066 } | |
2067 } | |
2068 | |
2069 | |
2070 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2071 window-based redisplay. */ | |
2072 | |
2073 static void | |
2074 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
2075 struct frame *f; | |
2076 { | |
2077 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2078 struct window *w; | |
2079 | |
2080 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
2081 | |
2082 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
2083 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
2084 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
2085 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
2086 #else | |
2087 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2088 #endif | |
2089 | |
2090 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
2091 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
2092 ch_dim); | |
2093 | |
2094 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
2095 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
2096 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
2097 { | |
2098 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
2099 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2100 { | |
2101 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
2102 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2103 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2104 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2105 } | |
2106 else | |
2107 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2108 | |
2109 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
2110 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
2111 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
2112 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2113 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2114 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2115 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2116 } | |
2117 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
2118 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2119 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the tool bar window. If we |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2120 don't have a tool bar window yet, make one. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2121 if (NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2122 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2123 f->tool_bar_window = make_window (); |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2124 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2125 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); |
2126 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2127 } | |
2128 else | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2129 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2130 |
2131 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2132 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2133 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOL_BAR_LINES (f)); |
25012 | 2134 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); |
2135 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2136 } | |
2137 | |
2138 | |
2139 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
2140 | |
2141 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
2142 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
2143 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
2144 | |
2145 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
2146 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
2147 | |
2148 static void | |
2149 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
2150 struct frame *f; | |
2151 { | |
2152 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
2153 | |
2154 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
2155 { | |
2156 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
2157 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
2158 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
2159 } | |
2160 else | |
2161 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
2162 } | |
2163 | |
2164 | |
2165 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
2166 | |
2167 static void | |
2168 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
2169 struct frame *f; | |
2170 { | |
2171 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
2172 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
2173 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
2174 } | |
2175 | |
2176 | |
2177 | |
2178 /********************************************************************** | |
2179 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
2180 **********************************************************************/ | |
2181 | |
2182 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
2183 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
2184 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
2185 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
2186 | |
2187 void | |
2188 free_glyphs (f) | |
2189 struct frame *f; | |
2190 { | |
2191 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
2192 { | |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2193 /* Block interrupt input so that we don't get surprised by an X |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2194 event while we're in an inconsistent state. */ |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2195 BLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 2196 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; |
2197 | |
2198 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
2199 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
2200 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
2201 | |
2202 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
2203 glyph matrices. */ | |
2204 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2205 { | |
2206 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2207 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2208 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2209 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2210 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
2211 } | |
2212 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2213 /* Free the tool bar window and its glyph matrices. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2214 if (!NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2215 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2216 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2217 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); |
2218 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2219 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2220 f->tool_bar_window = Qnil; |
25012 | 2221 } |
2222 | |
2223 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
2224 case we are called a second time. */ | |
2225 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
2226 { | |
2227 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
2228 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
2229 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2230 } | |
2231 | |
2232 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
2233 if (f->desired_pool) | |
2234 { | |
2235 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
2236 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
2237 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
314 | 2238 } |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2239 |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2240 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
314 | 2241 } |
2242 } | |
2243 | |
25012 | 2244 |
2245 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
2246 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
2247 the same tree more than once. */ | |
2248 | |
2249 void | |
2250 free_window_matrices (w) | |
2251 struct window *w; | |
2252 { | |
2253 while (w) | |
2254 { | |
2255 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2256 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2257 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2258 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2259 else | |
2260 { | |
2261 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
2262 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
2263 W. */ | |
2264 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2265 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2266 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
2267 } | |
2268 | |
2269 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2270 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2271 } | |
2272 } | |
2273 | |
2274 | |
2275 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
2276 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
2277 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
2278 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2279 |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2280 void |
25012 | 2281 check_glyph_memory () |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2282 { |
25012 | 2283 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
2284 | |
2285 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
2286 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2287 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
2288 | |
2289 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
2290 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
2291 abort (); | |
2292 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
2293 abort (); | |
2294 } | |
2295 | |
2296 | |
2297 | |
2298 /********************************************************************** | |
2299 Building a Frame Matrix | |
2300 **********************************************************************/ | |
2301 | |
2302 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
2303 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
2304 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
2305 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
2306 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
2307 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
2308 window matrices in this section. | |
2309 | |
2310 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
2311 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
2312 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
2313 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
2314 | |
2315 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2316 | desired | desired | | |
2317 | | | | |
2318 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2319 | current | | |
2320 | | | |
2321 +----------------------------------+ | |
2322 | |
2323 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
2324 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
2325 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
2326 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
2327 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
2328 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
2329 | |
2330 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
2331 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
2332 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
2333 enabled. | |
2334 | |
2335 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
2336 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
2337 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
2338 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
2339 | |
2340 This problem is solved like this: | |
2341 | |
2342 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
2343 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
2344 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
2345 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
2346 automatically. | |
2347 | |
2348 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
2349 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
2350 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
2351 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
2352 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
2353 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
2354 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
2355 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
2356 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
2357 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
2358 | |
2359 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
2360 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
2361 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
2362 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
2363 | |
2364 static void | |
2365 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
2366 struct frame *f; | |
2367 { | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2368 int i; |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2369 |
25012 | 2370 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
2371 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2372 | |
2373 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
2374 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
2375 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
2376 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
2377 | |
2378 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
2379 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
2380 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
2381 } | |
2382 | |
2383 | |
2384 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
2385 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
2386 | |
2387 static void | |
2388 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
2389 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2390 struct window *w; | |
2391 { | |
2392 while (w) | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2393 { |
25012 | 2394 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
2395 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2396 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2397 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2398 else | |
2399 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
2400 | |
2401 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2402 } |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2403 } |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2404 |
25012 | 2405 |
2406 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
2407 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
2408 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
2409 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
2410 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
2411 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
2412 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
2413 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
2414 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
2415 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
2416 | |
2417 static void | |
2418 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
2419 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2420 struct window *w; |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2421 { |
25012 | 2422 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
2423 int window_y, frame_y; | |
2424 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
2425 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
2426 | |
2427 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2428 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
2429 { | |
2430 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
2431 | |
2432 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
2433 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
2434 { | |
2435 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
2436 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2437 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2438 : '|'); | |
2439 } | |
2440 } | |
2441 else | |
2442 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
2443 | |
2444 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
2445 frame matrix. */ | |
2446 window_y = 0; | |
2447 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2448 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2449 { |
25012 | 2450 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
2451 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
2452 | |
2453 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
2454 window row. */ | |
2455 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
2456 | |
2457 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
2458 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
2459 | |
2460 if (window_matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2461 { |
25012 | 2462 /* We have to copy W's current matrix. Copy window |
2463 row to frame row. */ | |
2464 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], | |
2465 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
2466 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
2467 } | |
2468 else | |
2469 { | |
2470 /* Copy W's desired matrix. */ | |
2471 | |
2472 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent | |
2473 windows. */ | |
2474 if (right_border_glyph) | |
2475 { | |
2476 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
2477 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
2478 } | |
2479 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2480 #if 0 /* This shouldn't be necessary. Let's check it. */ |
25012 | 2481 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that |
2482 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
2483 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
2484 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
2485 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
2486 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
2487 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2488 { |
25012 | 2489 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
2490 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
2491 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
2492 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
2493 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
2494 | |
2495 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
2496 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
2497 | |
2498 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
2499 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2500 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2501 #endif |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2502 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2503 /* Window row window_y must be a slice of frame row |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2504 frame_y. */ |
25012 | 2505 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2506 |
25012 | 2507 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because |
2508 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2509 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2510 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2511 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2512 #endif |
25012 | 2513 } |
2514 | |
2515 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
2516 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
2517 can be done simply. */ | |
2518 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
2519 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
2520 | |
2521 /* Or in flags. */ | |
2522 frame_row->enabled_p |= window_row->enabled_p; | |
2523 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; | |
2524 | |
2525 /* Next row. */ | |
2526 ++window_y; | |
2527 ++frame_y; | |
2528 } | |
2529 } | |
2530 | |
2531 | |
2532 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
2533 | |
2534 Each row has the form: | |
2535 | |
2536 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2537 | left | text | right | | |
2538 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2539 | |
2540 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
2541 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
2542 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
2543 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
2544 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
2545 | |
2546 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
2547 | |
2548 static void | |
2549 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
2550 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2551 { | |
2552 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2553 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
2554 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2555 } | |
2556 | |
2557 | |
2558 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
2559 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
2560 | |
2561 static void | |
2562 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
2563 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2564 int area; | |
2565 { | |
2566 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
2567 { | |
2568 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
2569 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
2570 | |
2571 while (text < end) | |
2572 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
2573 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
2574 } | |
2575 } | |
2576 | |
2577 | |
2578 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
2579 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
2580 | |
2581 static void | |
2582 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
2583 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2584 int upto; | |
2585 { | |
2586 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2587 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2588 | |
2589 while (i < upto) | |
2590 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
2591 | |
2592 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
2593 } | |
2594 | |
2595 | |
2596 | |
2597 /********************************************************************** | |
2598 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
2599 **********************************************************************/ | |
2600 | |
2601 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
2602 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
2603 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
2604 | |
2605 static INLINE void | |
2606 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
2607 struct frame *f; | |
2608 { | |
2609 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
2610 } | |
2611 | |
2612 | |
2613 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
2614 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
2615 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
2616 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
2617 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
2618 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
2619 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
2620 | |
2621 static INLINE void | |
2622 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
2623 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
2624 int row; | |
2625 { | |
2626 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
2627 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
2628 | |
2629 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
2630 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
2631 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2632 | |
2633 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
2634 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
2635 | |
2636 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
2637 for window matrices. */ | |
2638 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2639 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
2640 } | |
2641 | |
2642 | |
2643 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
2644 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
2645 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
2646 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
2647 | |
2648 static void | |
2649 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
2650 struct window *w; | |
2651 int frame_row; | |
2652 { | |
2653 while (w) | |
2654 { | |
2655 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2656 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
2657 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2658 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
2659 else | |
2660 { | |
2661 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
2662 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
2663 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
2664 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2665 | |
2666 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
2667 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
2668 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2669 { |
25012 | 2670 struct glyph_row *current_row |
2671 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
2672 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
2673 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2674 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2675 if (desired_row->enabled_p) |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2676 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2677 else |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2678 swap_glyph_pointers (desired_row, current_row); |
25012 | 2679 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2680 } |
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2681 } |
25012 | 2682 |
2683 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2684 } |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2685 } |
25012 | 2686 |
2687 | |
2688 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
2689 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
2690 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
2691 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
2692 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
2693 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
2694 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
2695 | |
2696 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
2697 | |
2698 void | |
2699 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
2700 retained_p) | |
2701 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2702 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2703 int *copy_from; | |
2704 char *retained_p; | |
2705 { | |
2706 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
2707 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2708 | |
2709 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
2710 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
2711 | |
2712 int i; | |
2713 | |
2714 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
2715 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2716 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2717 | |
2718 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
2719 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2720 { | |
2721 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
2722 | |
2723 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
2724 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
2725 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
2726 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2727 | |
2728 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
2729 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2730 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
2731 } | |
2732 | |
2733 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
2734 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2735 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
2736 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2737 } | |
2738 | |
2739 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2740 /* Synchronize glyph pointers in the current matrix of window W with |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2741 the current frame matrix. W must be full-width, and be on a tty |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2742 frame. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2743 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2744 static void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2745 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2746 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2747 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2748 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2749 struct glyph_row *window_row, *window_row_end, *frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2750 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2751 /* Preconditions: W must be a leaf window and full-width. Its frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2752 must have a frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2753 xassert (NILP (w->hchild) && NILP (w->vchild)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2754 xassert (WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2755 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2756 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2757 /* If W is a full-width window, glyph pointers in W's current matrix |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2758 have, by definition, to be the same as glyph pointers in the |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2759 corresponding frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2760 window_row = w->current_matrix->rows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2761 window_row_end = window_row + w->current_matrix->nrows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2762 frame_row = f->current_matrix->rows + XFASTINT (w->top); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2763 while (window_row < window_row_end) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2764 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2765 int area; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2766 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2767 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area <= LAST_AREA; ++area) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2768 window_row->glyphs[area] = frame_row->glyphs[area]; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2769 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2770 ++window_row, ++frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2771 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2772 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2773 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2774 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2775 /* Return the window in the window tree rooted in W containing frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2776 row ROW. Value is null if none is found. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2777 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2778 struct window * |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2779 frame_row_to_window (w, row) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2780 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2781 int row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2782 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2783 struct window *found = NULL; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2784 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2785 while (w && !found) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2786 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2787 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2788 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->hchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2789 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2790 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->vchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2791 else if (row >= XFASTINT (w->top) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2792 && row < XFASTINT (w->top) + XFASTINT (w->height)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2793 found = w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2794 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2795 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2796 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2797 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2798 return found; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2799 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2800 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2801 |
25012 | 2802 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after |
2803 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
2804 | |
2805 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
2806 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
2807 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
2808 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
2809 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
2810 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
2811 which is empty. */ | |
2812 | |
2813 static void | |
2814 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
2815 struct window *w; | |
2816 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2817 int *copy_from; | |
2818 char *retained_p; | |
2819 { | |
2820 while (w) | |
2821 { | |
2822 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2823 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2824 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2825 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2826 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2827 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2828 else | |
2829 { | |
2830 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
2831 matrix m. */ | |
2832 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2833 int i, sync_p = 0; |
25012 | 2834 struct glyph_row *old_rows; |
2835 | |
2836 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
2837 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2838 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2839 | |
2840 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2841 { | |
2842 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
2843 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
2844 | |
2845 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
2846 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
2847 | |
2848 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
2849 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
2850 | |
2851 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
2852 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
2853 | |
2854 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
2855 int from_inside_window_p | |
2856 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
2857 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2858 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2859 int to_inside_window_p |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2860 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2861 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2862 if (from_inside_window_p && to_inside_window_p) |
25012 | 2863 { |
2864 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
2865 int enabled_before_p; | |
2866 | |
2867 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
2868 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
2869 that. */ | |
2870 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
2871 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
2872 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2873 | |
2874 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
2875 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2876 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
2877 } | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2878 else if (to_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2879 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2880 /* A copy between windows. This is an infrequent |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2881 case not worth optimizing. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2882 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2883 struct window *root = XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2884 struct window *w2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2885 struct glyph_matrix *m2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2886 int m2_from; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2887 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2888 w2 = frame_row_to_window (root, frame_to); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2889 m2 = w2->current_matrix; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2890 m2_from = frame_from - m2->matrix_y; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2891 copy_row_except_pointers (m->rows + window_to, |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2892 m2->rows + m2_from); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2893 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2894 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2895 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2896 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2897 sync_p = 1; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2898 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2899 else if (from_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2900 sync_p = 1; |
25012 | 2901 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2902 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2903 /* If there was a copy between windows, make sure glyph |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2904 pointers are in sync with the frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2905 if (sync_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2906 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w); |
25012 | 2907 |
2908 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
2909 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
2910 } | |
2911 | |
2912 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2913 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2914 } | |
2915 } | |
2916 | |
2917 | |
2918 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2919 | |
2920 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
2921 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
2922 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
2923 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
2924 glyph pointers. */ | |
314 | 2925 |
21514 | 2926 void |
25012 | 2927 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
314 | 2928 struct window *w; |
2929 { | |
25012 | 2930 while (w) |
2931 { | |
2932 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2933 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2934 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2935 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2936 else | |
2937 { | |
2938 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2939 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
2940 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
2941 } | |
2942 | |
2943 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2944 } | |
2945 } | |
2946 | |
2947 | |
2948 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
2949 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
2950 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
2951 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
2952 | |
2953 static void | |
2954 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
2955 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
2956 { | |
2957 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
2958 int i = 0; | |
2959 | |
2960 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2961 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2962 | |
2963 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
2964 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
2965 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
2966 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
2967 { | |
2968 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
2969 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
2970 abort (); | |
2971 ++i, ++j; | |
2972 } | |
2973 } | |
2974 | |
2975 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
2976 | |
2977 | |
2978 | |
2979 /********************************************************************** | |
2980 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
2981 **********************************************************************/ | |
2982 | |
2983 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2984 | |
2985 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
2986 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2987 | |
2988 static int | |
2989 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
2990 struct window *w; | |
2991 int vpos; | |
2992 { | |
2993 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2994 | |
2995 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2996 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
2997 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
2998 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2999 return vpos; | |
3000 } | |
3001 | |
3002 | |
3003 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
3004 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
3005 | |
3006 static int | |
3007 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
3008 struct window *w; | |
3009 int hpos; | |
3010 { | |
3011 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
3012 | |
3013 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3014 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
3015 return hpos; | |
314 | 3016 } |
25012 | 3017 |
3018 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
3019 | |
3020 | |
314 | 3021 |
25012 | 3022 /********************************************************************** |
3023 Redrawing Frames | |
3024 **********************************************************************/ | |
3025 | |
3026 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
3027 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
3028 (frame) | |
3029 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3030 { | |
3031 struct frame *f; | |
3032 | |
3033 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
3034 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
3035 | |
3036 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
3037 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
3038 called so early here). */ | |
3039 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
3040 return Qnil; | |
3041 | |
3042 update_begin (f); | |
3043 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
3044 set_terminal_modes (); | |
3045 clear_frame (); | |
3046 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
3047 update_end (f); | |
3048 fflush (stdout); | |
3049 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
3050 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
3051 its redisplay done. */ | |
3052 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
3053 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
3054 f->garbaged = 0; | |
3055 return Qnil; | |
3056 } | |
3057 | |
3058 | |
3059 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
3060 function redraw-frame. */ | |
3061 | |
3062 void | |
3063 redraw_frame (f) | |
3064 struct frame *f; | |
3065 { | |
3066 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3067 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
3068 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3069 } | |
3070 | |
3071 | |
3072 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
3073 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
3074 () | |
3075 { | |
3076 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3077 | |
3078 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3079 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3080 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3081 | |
3082 return Qnil; | |
3083 } | |
3084 | |
3085 | |
3086 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
3087 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
3088 | |
3089 void | |
3090 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
3091 { | |
3092 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3093 | |
3094 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3095 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
3096 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3097 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3098 } | |
3099 | |
3100 | |
3101 | |
3102 /*********************************************************************** | |
3103 Direct Operations | |
3104 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3105 | |
3106 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
3107 | |
3108 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
3109 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
3110 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
3111 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
3112 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
3113 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
3114 | |
3115 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
3116 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
3117 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
3118 for details where this function is called. */ | |
314 | 3119 |
3120 int | |
3121 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
3122 int g; | |
3123 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3124 register struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3125 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3126 struct it it, it2; | |
3127 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
3128 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
3129 int n; | |
3130 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
3131 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
3132 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
3133 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
3134 int added_width; | |
3135 struct text_pos pos; | |
3136 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
3137 | |
3138 /* Not done directly. */ | |
3139 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
3140 | |
3141 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
3142 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
3143 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
3144 || fonts_changed_p | |
3145 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3146 || face_change_count | |
3147 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
314 | 3148 || !display_completed |
25012 | 3149 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
314 | 3150 || buffer_shared > 1 |
25012 | 3151 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3152 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0])) |
25012 | 3153 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt |
3154 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
3155 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
3156 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
3157 || (overwrite_p | |
3158 && PT != ZV | |
3159 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
3160 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
3161 || g == '\t' | |
3162 || g == '\n' | |
3163 || g == '\r' | |
3164 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
3165 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3166 || (glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos), |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3167 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3168 lines would change. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3169 (glyph_row->continued_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3170 /* Can't use this method if the line overlaps others or is |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3171 overlapped by others because these other lines would |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3172 have to be redisplayed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3173 || glyph_row->overlapping_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3174 || glyph_row->overlapped_p)) |
25012 | 3175 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames |
3176 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
3177 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
3178 return 0; | |
3179 | |
3180 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
3181 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
3182 position. */ | |
3183 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
3184 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
28361
eccb57c44da5
(direct_output_for_insert): Use DEC_TEXT_POS
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27968
diff
changeset
|
3185 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos, !NILP (current_buffer->enable_multibyte_characters)); |
25012 | 3186 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, |
3187 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
3188 | |
3189 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3190 | |
3191 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
3192 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
3193 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3194 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace) |
25012 | 3195 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
3196 { | |
3197 struct glyph *last; | |
3198 | |
3199 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
3200 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
3201 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
3202 && last->u.ch == ' ')) |
25012 | 3203 return 0; |
3204 } | |
3205 | |
3206 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
3207 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
3208 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
3209 return 0; | |
3210 | |
3211 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3212 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3213 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
3214 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
3215 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
3216 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
3217 | |
3218 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
3219 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
3220 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
3221 combination of both. */ | |
3222 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
3223 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
3224 { | |
3225 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
3226 | |
3227 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
3228 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
3229 return 0; | |
3230 | |
3231 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
3232 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
3233 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
3234 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3235 || glyph_row->phys_ascent != it.phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3236 || glyph_row->phys_height != it.phys_ascent + it.phys_descent |
25012 | 3237 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) |
3238 return 0; | |
3239 | |
3240 delta += 1; | |
3241 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
3242 set_iterator_to_next (&it); | |
3243 } | |
3244 | |
3245 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
3246 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
3247 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
3248 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
314 | 3249 return 0; |
3250 | |
25012 | 3251 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
3252 it2 = it; | |
3253 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
3254 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
3255 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
3256 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
3257 { | |
3258 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
3259 return 0; | |
3260 set_iterator_to_next (&it2); | |
3261 } | |
3262 | |
3263 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
3264 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3265 | |
3266 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
3267 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
3268 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
3269 | |
3270 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
3271 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
25781
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3272 safe_bcopy ((char *) glyphs, (char *) (glyphs + n), |
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3273 (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); |
25012 | 3274 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); |
3275 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
3276 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3277 | |
3278 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
3279 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3280 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3281 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
3282 while (glyph < end) | |
3283 { | |
3284 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
3285 ++glyph; | |
3286 } | |
3287 | |
3288 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
3289 inserted ones. */ | |
3290 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
26546
0f43cc91d6a5
(direct_output_for_insert): Increment glyph positions
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26499
diff
changeset
|
3291 if (glyph->charpos > 0 && BUFFERP (glyph->object)) |
25012 | 3292 glyph->charpos += delta; |
3293 | |
3294 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
3295 { | |
3296 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
3297 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
3298 } | |
3299 | |
3300 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3301 increment_matrix_positions (w->current_matrix, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3302 w->cursor.vpos + 1, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3303 w->current_matrix->nrows, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3304 delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 3305 |
3306 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3307 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
3308 | |
26591
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3309 glyph_row->displays_text_p = 1; |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3310 w->window_end_vpos = make_number (max (w->cursor.vpos, |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3311 XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos))); |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3312 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3313 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
25012 | 3314 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); |
3315 | |
3316 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
3317 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
3318 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
3319 and updated_row. */ | |
3320 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
3321 update_begin (f); | |
3322 if (rif) | |
3323 { | |
3324 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3325 | |
3326 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3327 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3328 else | |
3329 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3330 } | |
3331 else | |
3332 { | |
3333 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3334 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3335 else | |
3336 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3337 } | |
3338 | |
3339 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
3340 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
3341 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3342 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3343 | |
3344 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
3345 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
3346 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
3347 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
3348 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
3349 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3350 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3351 else | |
3352 { | |
3353 int x, y; | |
3354 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3355 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3356 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3357 : 0)); | |
3358 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3359 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3360 } | |
3361 | |
3362 if (rif) | |
3363 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
3364 update_end (f); | |
3365 updated_row = NULL; | |
3366 fflush (stdout); | |
3367 | |
3368 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
3369 | |
25372
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3370 UNCHANGED_MODIFIED = MODIFF; |
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3371 BEG_UNCHANGED = GPT - BEG; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3372 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3373 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3374 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3375 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
314 | 3376 |
25012 | 3377 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3378 return 1; |
3379 } | |
3380 | |
25012 | 3381 |
3382 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
3383 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
3384 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
3385 | |
314 | 3386 int |
3387 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
3388 int n; | |
3389 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3390 struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3391 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3392 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3393 | |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3394 /* Give up if point moved out of or into a composition. */ |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
3395 if (check_point_in_composition (current_buffer, XINT (w->last_point), |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3396 current_buffer, PT)) |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3397 return 0; |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3398 |
25012 | 3399 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ |
3400 if (face_change_count) | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3401 return 0; |
25012 | 3402 |
3403 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
3404 displaying a message. */ | |
3405 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
3406 return 0; | |
3407 | |
3408 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
3409 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
314 | 3410 return 0; |
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3411 |
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3412 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3413 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3414 return 0; |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3415 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3416 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting trailing whitespace. */ |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3417 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3418 return 0; |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3419 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3420 /* Give up if we are showing a message or just cleared the message |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3421 because we might need to resize the echo area window. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3422 if (!NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) || !NILP (echo_area_buffer[1])) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3423 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3424 |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3425 /* Give up if currently displaying a message instead of the |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3426 minibuffer contents. */ |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3427 if (XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3428 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window)) |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3429 return 0; |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3430 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3431 /* Give up if we don't know where the cursor is. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3432 if (w->cursor.vpos < 0) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3433 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3434 |
25012 | 3435 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
3436 | |
3437 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
3438 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3439 return 0; |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3440 |
25012 | 3441 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
3442 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; | |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3443 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3444 |
3445 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3446 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3447 | |
3448 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3449 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3450 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3451 else | |
3452 { | |
3453 int x, y; | |
3454 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3455 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3456 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3457 : 0)); | |
3458 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3459 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3460 } | |
3461 | |
314 | 3462 fflush (stdout); |
25012 | 3463 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3464 return 1; |
3465 } | |
25012 | 3466 |
3467 | |
314 | 3468 |
25012 | 3469 /*********************************************************************** |
3470 Frame Update | |
3471 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3472 | |
3473 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
3474 | |
3475 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
3476 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
3477 scrolling. | |
3478 | |
3479 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
314 | 3480 |
3481 int | |
25012 | 3482 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
3483 struct frame *f; | |
3484 int force_p; | |
3485 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
3486 { | |
3487 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
3488 int paused_p; | |
3489 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
3490 | |
3491 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3492 { | |
3493 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
3494 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
3495 | |
3496 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
3497 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3498 | |
3499 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
3500 when pending input is detected. */ | |
3501 update_begin (f); | |
3502 | |
3503 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
3504 support. */ | |
3505 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
3506 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
3507 | |
3508 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3509 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 3510 { |
3511 Lisp_Object tem; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3512 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 3513 |
3514 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
3515 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3516 { | |
3517 update_window (w, 1); | |
3518 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3519 | |
3520 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
3521 reuse strings. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3522 tem = f->current_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3523 f->current_tool_bar_string = f->desired_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3524 f->desired_tool_bar_string = tem; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3525 f->n_current_tool_bar_items = f->n_desired_tool_bar_items; |
25012 | 3526 |
3527 /* Swap tool-bar items. We swap because we want to | |
3528 reuse vectors. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3529 tem = f->current_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3530 f->current_tool_bar_items = f->desired_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3531 f->desired_tool_bar_items = tem; |
25012 | 3532 } |
3533 } | |
3534 | |
3535 | |
3536 /* Update windows. */ | |
3537 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
3538 update_end (f); | |
3539 display_completed = !paused_p; | |
3540 | |
3541 /* The flush is a performance bottleneck under X. */ | |
3542 #if 0 | |
3543 rif->flush_display (f); | |
3544 #endif | |
3545 } | |
3546 else | |
3547 { | |
3548 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
3549 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
3550 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
3551 | |
3552 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. For windows | |
3553 whose must_be_updated_p flag is set, desired matrices are | |
3554 made part of the desired frame matrix. For other windows, | |
3555 the current matrix is copied. */ | |
3556 build_frame_matrix (f); | |
3557 | |
3558 /* Do the update on the frame desired matrix. */ | |
3559 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); | |
3560 | |
3561 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ | |
3562 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
3563 } | |
3564 | |
3565 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
3566 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
3567 return paused_p; | |
3568 } | |
3569 | |
3570 | |
3571 | |
3572 /************************************************************************ | |
3573 Window-based updates | |
3574 ************************************************************************/ | |
3575 | |
3576 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
3577 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
3578 | |
3579 static int | |
3580 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
3581 struct window *w; | |
3582 int force_p; | |
3583 { | |
3584 int paused_p = 0; | |
3585 | |
3586 while (w && !paused_p) | |
3587 { | |
3588 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
3589 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
3590 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
3591 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
3592 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3593 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
3594 | |
3595 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
3596 } | |
3597 | |
3598 return paused_p; | |
3599 } | |
3600 | |
3601 | |
3602 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
3603 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
3604 | |
3605 void | |
3606 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
3607 struct window *w; | |
3608 int force_p; | |
3609 { | |
3610 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3611 { | |
3612 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3613 | |
3614 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
3615 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3616 | |
3617 /* Update W. */ | |
3618 update_begin (f); | |
3619 update_window (w, force_p); | |
3620 update_end (f); | |
3621 | |
3622 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
3623 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3624 } | |
3625 } | |
3626 | |
3627 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3628 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that are |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3629 overlapped by other rows. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3630 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3631 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3632 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3633 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3634 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3635 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3636 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3637 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3638 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3639 /* If rows overlapping others have been changed, the rows being |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3640 overlapped have to be redrawn. This won't draw lines that have |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3641 already been drawn in update_window_line because overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3642 desired rows is 0, so after row assignment overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3643 current rows is 0. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3644 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3645 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3646 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3647 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3648 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3649 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3650 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3651 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3652 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3653 if (row->overlapped_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3654 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3655 enum glyph_row_area area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3656 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3657 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3658 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3659 updated_row = row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3660 updated_area = area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3661 rif->cursor_to (i, 0, row->y, area == TEXT_AREA ? row->x : 0); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3662 if (row->used[area]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3663 rif->write_glyphs (row->glyphs[area], row->used[area]); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3664 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3665 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3666 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3667 row->overlapped_p = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3668 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3669 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3670 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3671 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3672 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3673 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3674 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3675 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3676 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3677 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that overlap |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3678 others. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3679 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3680 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3681 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3682 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3683 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3684 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3685 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3686 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3687 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3688 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3689 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3690 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3691 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3692 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3693 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3694 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3695 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3696 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3697 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3698 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3699 if (row->overlapping_p && i > 0 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3700 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3701 if (row->used[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3702 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3703 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3704 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3705 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, TEXT_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3706 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3707 if (row->used[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3708 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3709 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3710 /* Record in neighbor rows that ROW overwrites part of their |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3711 display. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3712 if (row->phys_ascent > row->ascent && i > 0) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3713 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i - 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3714 if ((row->phys_height - row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3715 > row->height - row->ascent) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3716 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3717 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i + 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3718 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3719 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3720 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3721 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3722 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3723 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3724 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3725 |
25012 | 3726 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should |
3727 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
3728 | |
3729 static int | |
3730 update_window (w, force_p) | |
3731 struct window *w; | |
3732 int force_p; | |
3733 { | |
3734 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3735 int paused_p; | |
3736 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
3737 extern int input_pending; | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3738 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3739 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); |
25012 | 3740 extern struct frame *updating_frame; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3741 #endif |
25012 | 3742 |
3743 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
3744 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3745 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
3746 | |
3747 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
3748 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
3749 force_p = 1; | |
3750 else | |
3751 detect_input_pending (); | |
3752 | |
3753 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
3754 the update. */ | |
3755 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
3756 { | |
3757 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
3758 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
25546 | 3759 struct glyph_row *header_line_row = NULL; |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3760 int yb, changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3761 |
3762 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3763 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3764 | |
3765 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
3766 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
3767 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
3768 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
3769 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
25546 | 3770 header_line_row = row++; |
25012 | 3771 |
3772 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
3773 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
3774 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3775 { | |
3776 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
3777 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
3778 desired_matrix)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3779 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3780 } |
3781 | |
3782 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
3783 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
3784 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
3785 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
3786 ++row; | |
3787 | |
3788 /* Try reusing part of the display by inserting/deleting lines. */ | |
3789 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) | |
3790 { | |
25546 | 3791 int rc = scrolling_window (w, header_line_row != NULL); |
25012 | 3792 if (rc < 0) |
3793 { | |
3794 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
3795 paused_p = 0; | |
3796 goto set_cursor; | |
3797 } | |
3798 else if (rc > 0) | |
3799 force_p = 1; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3800 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3801 } |
3802 | |
3803 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
3804 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
3805 that can be scrolled. */ | |
25546 | 3806 if (header_line_row && header_line_row->enabled_p) |
25012 | 3807 { |
25546 | 3808 header_line_row->y = 0; |
25012 | 3809 update_window_line (w, 0); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3810 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3811 } |
3812 | |
3813 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
3814 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
3815 if (row->enabled_p | |
3816 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired | |
3817 matrix was built with a vscroll and then | |
3818 make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts the matrix. */ | |
3819 && row->visible_height > 0) | |
3820 { | |
3821 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
3822 int i; | |
3823 | |
3824 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
3825 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
3826 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
3827 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
3828 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
3829 detect_input_pending (); | |
3830 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3831 changed_p |= update_window_line (w, vpos); |
25012 | 3832 |
3833 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
3834 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
3835 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
3836 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
3837 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
3838 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
3839 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
3840 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
3841 in the first redisplay. */ | |
3842 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
3843 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
3844 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3845 } | |
3846 | |
3847 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
3848 paused_p = row < end; | |
3849 | |
3850 set_cursor: | |
3851 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3852 /* Fix the appearance of overlapping(overlapped rows. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3853 if (rif->fix_overlapping_area |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3854 && !w->pseudo_window_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3855 && changed_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3856 && !paused_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3857 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3858 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3859 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3860 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3861 |
25012 | 3862 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) |
3863 { | |
3864 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ | |
3865 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
3866 | |
3867 #if 0 | |
3868 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This | |
3869 is for debugging only. See the comment around | |
3870 check_matrix_invariants. */ | |
3871 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); | |
3872 #endif | |
3873 } | |
3874 | |
3875 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3876 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
3877 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
3878 #endif | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3879 |
25012 | 3880 /* End of update of window W. */ |
3881 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3882 |
25012 | 3883 } |
3884 else | |
3885 paused_p = 1; | |
3886 | |
3887 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3888 |
25012 | 3889 return paused_p; |
3890 } | |
3891 | |
3892 | |
3893 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
3894 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
3895 | |
3896 static void | |
3897 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
3898 struct window *w; | |
3899 int area, vpos; | |
3900 { | |
3901 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3902 | |
3903 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3904 will be relative to. */ | |
3905 updated_area = area; | |
3906 | |
3907 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
3908 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
3909 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
3910 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
3911 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
3912 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
3913 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3914 } | |
3915 | |
3916 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3917 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3918 Value is non-zero if display has changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3919 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3920 static int |
25012 | 3921 update_text_area (w, vpos) |
3922 struct window *w; | |
3923 int vpos; | |
314 | 3924 { |
25012 | 3925 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
3926 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3927 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3928 |
3929 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3930 will be relative to. */ | |
3931 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
3932 | |
3933 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
3934 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
3935 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3936 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3937 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3938 || desired_row->phys_ascent != current_row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3939 || desired_row->phys_height != current_row->phys_height |
25012 | 3940 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3941 || current_row->overlapped_p |
25012 | 3942 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) |
3943 { | |
3944 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
3945 | |
3946 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3947 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
3948 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3949 | |
3950 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
3951 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3952 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3953 } |
3954 else | |
3955 { | |
3956 int stop, i, x; | |
3957 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3958 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3959 | |
3960 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
3961 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
3962 extension actually takes place. */ | |
3963 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3964 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
3965 ? 1 : 0)); | |
3966 | |
3967 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
3968 i = 0; | |
3969 x = desired_row->x; | |
3970 | |
3971 while (i < stop) | |
3972 { | |
3973 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These | |
3974 don't have to be written. */ | |
3975 while (i < stop | |
3976 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) | |
3977 { | |
3978 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3979 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3980 } | |
3981 | |
3982 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx ppp | |
3983 ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row is "xxx | |
3984 ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' has not. The | |
3985 loop above will stop in front of the first `p' in the | |
3986 current row. If we would start writing glyphs there, we | |
3987 wouldn't erase the lbearing of the `p'. The rest of the | |
3988 lbearing problem is then taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ | |
3989 if (current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3990 && i > 0 | |
3991 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3992 && current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3993 { | |
3994 int left, right; | |
3995 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), | |
3996 &left, &right); | |
3997 while (left > 0 && i > 0) | |
3998 { | |
3999 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; | |
4000 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4001 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4002 } | |
4003 } | |
4004 | |
4005 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
4006 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
4007 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
4008 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
4009 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4010 { | |
4011 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
4012 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
4013 int current_x = x; | |
4014 | |
4015 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ | |
4016 while (i < stop | |
4017 && !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph) | |
4018 && x == current_x) | |
4019 { | |
4020 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4021 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4022 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
4023 } | |
4024 | |
4025 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
4026 { | |
4027 i = start_hpos; | |
4028 x = start_x; | |
4029 desired_glyph = start; | |
4030 break; | |
4031 } | |
4032 | |
4033 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); | |
4034 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4035 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4036 } |
4037 } | |
4038 | |
4039 /* Write the rest. */ | |
4040 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4041 { | |
4042 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
4043 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4044 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4045 } |
4046 | |
4047 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
4048 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
4049 { | |
4050 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
4051 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
4052 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
4053 appropriately above. */ | |
4054 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
4055 } | |
4056 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
4057 { | |
4058 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
4059 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4060 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4061 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4062 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4063 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4064 } |
4065 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
4066 { | |
4067 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
4068 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
4069 int x; | |
4070 | |
4071 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4072 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4073 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4074 | |
4075 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
4076 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
4077 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
4078 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
4079 this way. */ | |
4080 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
4081 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4082 { | |
4083 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
4084 x = -1; | |
4085 } | |
4086 else | |
4087 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
4088 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4089 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4090 } |
4091 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4092 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4093 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4094 } |
4095 | |
4096 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4097 /* Update row VPOS in window W. Value is non-zero if display has been |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4098 changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4099 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4100 static int |
25012 | 4101 update_window_line (w, vpos) |
4102 struct window *w; | |
4103 int vpos; | |
4104 { | |
4105 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4106 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4107 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 4108 |
4109 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); | |
4110 | |
4111 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
4112 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
4113 updated_row = desired_row; | |
4114 | |
4115 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ | |
4116 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
4117 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4118 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4119 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4120 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4121 } |
25012 | 4122 |
4123 /* Update the display of the text area. */ | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4124 changed_p |= update_text_area (w, vpos); |
25012 | 4125 |
4126 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ | |
4127 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
4128 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4129 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4130 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4131 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4132 } |
25012 | 4133 |
4134 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ | |
4135 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
4136 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
4137 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height | |
4138 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p | |
4139 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p | |
4140 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p | |
4141 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p | |
4142 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p | |
4143 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p | |
4144 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) | |
4145 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) | |
4146 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) | |
4147 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); | |
4148 | |
4149 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
4150 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4151 updated_row = NULL; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4152 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4153 } |
4154 | |
4155 | |
4156 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
4157 be called from update_window. */ | |
4158 | |
4159 static void | |
4160 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
4161 struct window *w; | |
4162 { | |
4163 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
4164 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
4165 | |
4166 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
4167 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
4168 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4169 if (cursor_in_echo_area |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4170 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4171 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4172 show the cursor for the message instead. */ |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4173 && XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4174 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25012 | 4175 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
4176 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
4177 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
4178 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
4179 { | |
4180 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
4181 | |
4182 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
4183 { | |
4184 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
4185 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
4186 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
4187 determine Y. */ | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4188 struct glyph_row *row, *last_row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4189 struct glyph *glyph; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4190 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4191 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4192 last_row = NULL; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4193 for (row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0); |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4194 row->enabled_p; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4195 ++row) |
25012 | 4196 { |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4197 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4198 && row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][0].charpos >= 0) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4199 last_row = row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4200 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4201 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4202 break; |
25012 | 4203 } |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4204 |
25012 | 4205 if (last_row) |
4206 { | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4207 struct glyph *start = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4208 struct glyph *last = start + row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4209 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4210 while (last > start && last->charpos < 0) |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4211 --last; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4212 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4213 for (glyph = start; glyph < last; ++glyph) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4214 { |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4215 cx += glyph->pixel_width; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4216 ++hpos; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4217 } |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4218 |
25012 | 4219 cy = last_row->y; |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4220 vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (last_row, w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 4221 } |
4222 } | |
4223 } | |
4224 else | |
4225 { | |
4226 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
4227 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
4228 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
4229 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
4230 } | |
4231 | |
4232 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
4233 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
4234 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
4235 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
4236 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
4237 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
4238 } | |
4239 | |
4240 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4241 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p to ON_P for all windows in the window |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4242 tree rooted at W. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4243 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4244 void |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4245 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4246 struct window *w; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4247 int on_p; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4248 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4249 while (w) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4250 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4251 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4252 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4253 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4254 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4255 else |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4256 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4257 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4258 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4259 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4260 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4261 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4262 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4263 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4264 /*********************************************************************** |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4265 Window-Based Scrolling |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4266 ***********************************************************************/ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4267 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4268 /* Structure describing rows in scrolling_window. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4269 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4270 struct row_entry |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4271 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4272 /* Number of occurrences of this row in desired and current matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4273 int old_uses, new_uses; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4274 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4275 /* Vpos of row in new matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4276 int new_line_number; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4277 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4278 /* Bucket index of this row_entry in the hash table row_table. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4279 int bucket; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4280 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4281 /* The row described by this entry. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4282 struct glyph_row *row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4283 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4284 /* Hash collision chain. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4285 struct row_entry *next; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4286 }; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4287 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4288 /* A pool to allocate row_entry structures from, and the size of the |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4289 pool. The pool is reallocated in scrolling_window when we find |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4290 that we need a larger one. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4291 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4292 static struct row_entry *row_entry_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4293 static int row_entry_pool_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4294 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4295 /* Index of next free entry in row_entry_pool. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4296 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4297 static int row_entry_idx; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4298 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4299 /* The hash table used during scrolling, and the table's size. This |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4300 table is used to quickly identify equal rows in the desired and |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4301 current matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4302 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4303 static struct row_entry **row_table; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4304 static int row_table_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4305 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4306 /* Vectors of pointers to row_entry structures belonging to the |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4307 current and desired matrix, and the size of the vectors. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4308 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4309 static struct row_entry **old_lines, **new_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4310 static int old_lines_size, new_lines_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4311 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4312 /* A pool to allocate run structures from, and its size. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4313 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4314 static struct run *run_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4315 static int runs_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4316 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4317 /* A vector of runs of lines found during scrolling. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4318 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4319 static struct run **runs; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4320 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4321 static struct row_entry *add_row_entry P_ ((struct window *, |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4322 struct glyph_row *)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4323 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4324 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4325 /* Add glyph row ROW to the scrolling hash table during the scrolling |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4326 of window W. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4327 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4328 static INLINE struct row_entry * |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4329 add_row_entry (w, row) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4330 struct window *w; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4331 struct glyph_row *row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4332 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4333 struct row_entry *entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4334 int i = row->hash % row_table_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4335 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4336 entry = row_table[i]; |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
4337 while (entry && !row_equal_p (w, entry->row, row, 1)) |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4338 entry = entry->next; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4339 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4340 if (entry == NULL) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4341 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4342 entry = row_entry_pool + row_entry_idx++; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4343 entry->row = row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4344 entry->old_uses = entry->new_uses = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4345 entry->new_line_number = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4346 entry->bucket = i; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4347 entry->next = row_table[i]; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4348 row_table[i] = entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4349 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4350 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4351 return entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4352 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4353 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4354 |
25012 | 4355 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. |
25546 | 4356 HEADER_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. |
25012 | 4357 |
4358 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
4359 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
4360 O(N) time. | |
4361 | |
4362 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
4363 | |
4364 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
4365 | |
4366 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
4367 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
4368 | |
4369 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
4370 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
4371 | |
4372 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
4373 forward and backward. | |
4374 | |
4375 Value is | |
4376 | |
4377 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
4378 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
4379 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
4380 | |
4381 static int | |
25546 | 4382 scrolling_window (w, header_line_p) |
25012 | 4383 struct window *w; |
25546 | 4384 int header_line_p; |
25012 | 4385 { |
4386 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
4387 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
4388 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4389 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4390 int nruns, nbytes, n, run_idx; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4391 struct row_entry *entry; |
25012 | 4392 |
4393 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
25546 | 4394 i = header_line_p ? 1 : 0; |
25012 | 4395 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 |
4396 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i) | |
4397 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i) | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4398 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) <= yb |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4399 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) <= yb |
25012 | 4400 && row_equal_p (w, |
4401 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i), | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
4402 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), 1)) |
25012 | 4403 { |
4404 assign_row (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), | |
4405 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4406 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
4407 ++i; | |
4408 } | |
4409 | |
4410 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
4411 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4412 return -1; | |
4413 | |
4414 first_old = first_new = i; | |
4415 | |
4416 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4417 desired matrix. */ | |
4418 i = first_new + 1; | |
4419 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4420 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4421 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) <= yb) |
25012 | 4422 ++i; |
4423 | |
4424 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4425 return 0; | |
4426 | |
4427 last_new = i; | |
4428 | |
4429 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4430 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
4431 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
4432 disabled. */ | |
4433 i = first_old + 1; | |
4434 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4435 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) <= yb) |
25012 | 4436 ++i; |
4437 last_old = i; | |
4438 | |
4439 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
4440 i = last_new; | |
4441 j = last_old; | |
4442 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
4443 && j - 1 > first_old | |
4444 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
4445 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
4446 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
4447 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4448 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
4449 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1), 1)) |
25012 | 4450 --i, --j; |
4451 last_new = i; | |
4452 last_old = j; | |
4453 | |
4454 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
4455 if (last_new == first_new) | |
4456 return 0; | |
4457 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4458 /* Reallocate vectors, tables etc. if necessary. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4459 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4460 if (current_matrix->nrows > old_lines_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4461 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4462 old_lines_size = current_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4463 nbytes = old_lines_size * sizeof *old_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4464 old_lines = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (old_lines, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4465 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4466 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4467 if (desired_matrix->nrows > new_lines_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4468 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4469 new_lines_size = desired_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4470 nbytes = new_lines_size * sizeof *new_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4471 new_lines = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (new_lines, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4472 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4473 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4474 n = desired_matrix->nrows + current_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4475 if (3 * n > row_table_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4476 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4477 row_table_size = next_almost_prime (3 * n); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4478 nbytes = row_table_size * sizeof *row_table; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4479 row_table = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (row_table, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4480 bzero (row_table, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4481 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4482 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4483 if (n > row_entry_pool_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4484 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4485 row_entry_pool_size = n; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4486 nbytes = row_entry_pool_size * sizeof *row_entry_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4487 row_entry_pool = (struct row_entry *) xrealloc (row_entry_pool, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4488 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4489 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4490 if (desired_matrix->nrows > runs_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4491 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4492 runs_size = desired_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4493 nbytes = runs_size * sizeof *runs; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4494 runs = (struct run **) xrealloc (runs, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4495 nbytes = runs_size * sizeof *run_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4496 run_pool = (struct run *) xrealloc (run_pool, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4497 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4498 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4499 nruns = run_idx = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4500 row_entry_idx = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4501 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4502 /* Add rows from the current and desired matrix to the hash table |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4503 row_hash_table to be able to find equal ones quickly. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4504 |
25012 | 4505 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) |
4506 { | |
4507 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4508 { | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4509 entry = add_row_entry (w, MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4510 old_lines[i] = entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4511 ++entry->old_uses; |
25012 | 4512 } |
4513 else | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4514 old_lines[i] = NULL; |
25012 | 4515 } |
4516 | |
4517 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
4518 { | |
4519 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4520 entry = add_row_entry (w, MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4521 ++entry->new_uses; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4522 entry->new_line_number = i; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4523 new_lines[i] = entry; |
25012 | 4524 } |
4525 | |
4526 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
4527 in both matrices. */ | |
4528 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4529 if (old_lines[i] |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4530 && old_lines[i]->old_uses == 1 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4531 && old_lines[i]->new_uses == 1) |
25012 | 4532 { |
4533 int j, k; | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4534 int new_line = old_lines[i]->new_line_number; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4535 struct run *run = run_pool + run_idx++; |
25012 | 4536 |
4537 /* Record move. */ | |
4538 run->current_vpos = i; | |
4539 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
4540 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
4541 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
4542 run->nrows = 1; | |
4543 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
4544 | |
4545 /* Extend backward. */ | |
4546 j = i - 1; | |
4547 k = new_line - 1; | |
4548 while (j > first_old | |
4549 && k > first_new | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4550 && old_lines[j] == new_lines[k]) |
25012 | 4551 { |
4552 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4553 --run->current_vpos; | |
4554 --run->desired_vpos; | |
4555 ++run->nrows; | |
4556 run->height += h; | |
4557 run->desired_y -= h; | |
4558 run->current_y -= h; | |
4559 --j, --k; | |
4560 } | |
4561 | |
4562 /* Extend forward. */ | |
4563 j = i + 1; | |
4564 k = new_line + 1; | |
4565 while (j < last_old | |
4566 && k < last_new | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4567 && old_lines[j] == new_lines[k]) |
25012 | 4568 { |
4569 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4570 ++run->nrows; | |
4571 run->height += h; | |
4572 ++j, ++k; | |
4573 } | |
4574 | |
4575 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
4576 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
4577 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
4578 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
4579 case. */ | |
4580 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
4581 ; | |
4582 for (k = nruns; k >= j; --k) | |
4583 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; | |
4584 runs[j] = run; | |
4585 ++nruns; | |
4586 | |
4587 i += run->nrows; | |
4588 } | |
4589 else | |
4590 ++i; | |
4591 | |
4592 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
4593 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
4594 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
4595 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
4596 | |
4597 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4598 | A | | B | | |
4599 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
4600 | B | | A | | |
4601 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4602 | |
4603 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
4604 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4605 | |
4606 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
4607 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
4608 { | |
4609 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
4610 | |
4611 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
4612 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
4613 { | |
4614 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
4615 | |
4616 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4617 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
4618 { | |
4619 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
4620 | |
4621 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
4622 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
4623 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
4624 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
4625 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
4626 p->nrows = 0; | |
4627 } | |
4628 } | |
4629 | |
4630 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
4631 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
4632 { | |
4633 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4634 int to_overlapped_p; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4635 |
25012 | 4636 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4637 to_overlapped_p = to->overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4638 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
4639 assign_row (to, from); | |
4640 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4641 to->overlapped_p = to_overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4642 } |
4643 } | |
4644 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4645 /* Clear the hash table, for the next time. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4646 for (i = 0; i < row_entry_idx; ++i) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4647 row_table[row_entry_pool[i].bucket] = NULL; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4648 |
25012 | 4649 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ |
4650 return 1; | |
4651 } | |
4652 | |
4653 | |
4654 | |
4655 /************************************************************************ | |
4656 Frame-Based Updates | |
4657 ************************************************************************/ | |
4658 | |
4659 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
4660 | |
4661 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
4662 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
4663 should not be tried. | |
4664 | |
4665 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
4666 | |
4667 static int | |
4668 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
4669 struct frame *f; | |
4670 int force_p; | |
4671 int inhibit_id_p; | |
4672 { | |
4673 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
4674 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
4675 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
4676 int i; | |
314 | 4677 int pause; |
4678 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
21514 | 4679 extern int input_pending; |
25012 | 4680 |
4681 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
314 | 4682 |
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4683 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4684 calculate_costs (f); |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4685 |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4686 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4687 preempt_count = 1; |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4688 |
314 | 4689 detect_input_pending (); |
25012 | 4690 if (input_pending && !force_p) |
314 | 4691 { |
4692 pause = 1; | |
4693 goto do_pause; | |
4694 } | |
4695 | |
764 | 4696 update_begin (f); |
314 | 4697 |
25012 | 4698 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
314 | 4699 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
25012 | 4700 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4701 |
493 | 4702 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
25012 | 4703 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
4704 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
4705 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
314 | 4706 break; |
4707 | |
4708 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
25012 | 4709 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
4710 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
314 | 4711 |
4712 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
25012 | 4713 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
4714 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
4715 | |
4716 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
4717 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
314 | 4718 { |
25012 | 4719 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4720 { |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4721 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
314 | 4722 { |
4723 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
4724 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
4725 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
4726 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
4727 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
4728 if (outq > 900 | |
4729 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
4730 { | |
4731 fflush (stdout); | |
4732 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
4733 { | |
554 | 4734 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
4735 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
314 | 4736 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
25012 | 4737 * the outq count. */ |
314 | 4738 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
4739 #endif | |
4740 outq *= 10; | |
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4741 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4742 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
314 | 4743 } |
4744 } | |
4745 } | |
4746 | |
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4747 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4748 detect_input_pending (); |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4749 |
25012 | 4750 update_frame_line (f, i); |
314 | 4751 } |
4752 } | |
25012 | 4753 |
764 | 4754 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
314 | 4755 |
4756 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
4757 if (!pause) | |
4758 { | |
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4759 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
25012 | 4760 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4761 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
25012 | 4762 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4763 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4764 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4765 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]))) |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4766 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
25012 | 4767 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4768 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4769 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
708 | 4770 { |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4771 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4772 int row, col; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4773 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4774 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4775 { |
25012 | 4776 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4777 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4778 row = top; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4779 col = 0; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4780 } |
708 | 4781 else |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4782 { |
25012 | 4783 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4784 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
4785 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
4786 any text on it. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4787 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4788 do |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4789 { |
25012 | 4790 --row; |
4791 col = 0; | |
4792 | |
4793 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
4794 { | |
4795 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
4796 must be ignored here. */ | |
4797 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
4798 row); | |
4799 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4800 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4801 | |
4802 while (last > start | |
4803 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
4804 --last; | |
4805 | |
4806 col = last - start; | |
4807 } | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4808 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4809 while (row > top && col == 0); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4810 |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4811 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4812 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4813 { |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4814 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4815 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4816 { |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4817 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4818 row++; |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4819 } |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4820 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4821 else |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4822 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4823 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4824 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4825 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4826 cursor_to (row, col); |
708 | 4827 } |
314 | 4828 else |
25012 | 4829 { |
4830 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
4831 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
4832 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
29687
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4833 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0 |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4834 /* The cursor vpos may be temporarily out of bounds |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4835 in the following situation: There is one window, |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4836 with the cursor in the lower half of it. The window |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4837 is split, and a message causes a redisplay before |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4838 a new cursor position has been computed. */ |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4839 && w->cursor.vpos < XFASTINT (w->height)) |
25012 | 4840 { |
4841 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
4842 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
4843 | |
4844 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
4845 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
4846 | |
4847 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
4848 cursor_to (y, x); | |
4849 } | |
4850 } | |
314 | 4851 } |
4852 | |
764 | 4853 update_end (f); |
314 | 4854 |
4855 if (termscript) | |
4856 fflush (termscript); | |
4857 fflush (stdout); | |
4858 | |
4859 do_pause: | |
4860 | |
4861 display_completed = !pause; | |
25012 | 4862 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
314 | 4863 return pause; |
4864 } | |
4865 | |
25012 | 4866 |
4867 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
314 | 4868 |
21514 | 4869 int |
764 | 4870 scrolling (frame) |
25012 | 4871 struct frame *frame; |
314 | 4872 { |
4873 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
4874 int window_size; | |
4875 int changed_lines; | |
764 | 4876 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
4877 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
4878 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4879 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
314 | 4880 register int i; |
764 | 4881 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
25012 | 4882 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4883 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4884 | |
4885 if (!current_matrix) | |
4886 abort (); | |
4887 | |
4888 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
4889 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
4890 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
314 | 4891 changed_lines = 0; |
4892 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
764 | 4893 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
4894 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
314 | 4895 { |
4896 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
25012 | 4897 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4898 return 0; |
25012 | 4899 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
4900 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4901 { |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4902 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4903 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4904 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4905 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4906 } |
314 | 4907 else |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4908 { |
25012 | 4909 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
4910 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4911 } |
314 | 4912 |
4913 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
4914 { | |
4915 changed_lines++; | |
764 | 4916 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
314 | 4917 } |
4918 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
4919 unchanged_at_top++; | |
25012 | 4920 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
314 | 4921 } |
4922 | |
4923 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
25012 | 4924 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
764 | 4925 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
314 | 4926 return 1; |
4927 | |
764 | 4928 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
314 | 4929 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
4930 | |
4931 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
4932 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
764 | 4933 else if (memory_below_frame) |
314 | 4934 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
4935 | |
4936 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
25012 | 4937 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4938 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
314 | 4939 && (window_size >= |
4940 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
764 | 4941 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4942 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
4943 return 0; | |
4944 | |
25012 | 4945 if (window_size < 2) |
4946 return 0; | |
4947 | |
764 | 4948 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4949 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4950 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
314 | 4951 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
4952 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
4953 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
4954 | |
4955 return 0; | |
4956 } | |
25012 | 4957 |
4958 | |
4959 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
4960 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
4961 | |
4962 static int | |
4963 count_blanks (r, len) | |
4964 struct glyph *r; | |
4965 int len; | |
314 | 4966 { |
25012 | 4967 int i; |
4968 | |
4969 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
4970 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
4971 break; | |
4972 | |
4973 return i; | |
314 | 4974 } |
25012 | 4975 |
4976 | |
4977 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
4978 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
4979 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
314 | 4980 |
4981 static int | |
25012 | 4982 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
4983 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
314 | 4984 { |
25012 | 4985 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
4986 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
4987 | |
4988 while (p1 < end1 | |
4989 && p2 < end2 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
4990 && GLYPH_CHAR_AND_FACE_EQUAL_P (p1, p2)) |
25012 | 4991 ++p1, ++p2; |
4992 | |
4993 return p1 - str1; | |
314 | 4994 } |
4995 | |
25012 | 4996 |
314 | 4997 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
25012 | 4998 |
314 | 4999 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5000 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
314 | 5001 |
25012 | 5002 |
5003 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
5004 | |
314 | 5005 static void |
25012 | 5006 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
5007 register struct frame *frame; | |
314 | 5008 int vpos; |
5009 { | |
25012 | 5010 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
314 | 5011 int tem; |
5012 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
25012 | 5013 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
5014 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
5015 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
5016 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
5017 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
5018 | |
5019 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
5020 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
314 | 5021 { |
25012 | 5022 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
5023 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
5024 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
314 | 5025 } |
5026 else | |
25012 | 5027 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
5028 | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5029 /* Current row not enabled means it has unknown contents. We must |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5030 write the whole desired line in that case. */ |
25012 | 5031 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; |
5032 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
314 | 5033 { |
25012 | 5034 obody = 0; |
314 | 5035 olen = 0; |
5036 } | |
5037 else | |
5038 { | |
25012 | 5039 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); |
5040 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5041 | |
5042 if (! current_row->inverse_p) | |
314 | 5043 { |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5044 /* Ignore trailing spaces, if we can. */ |
314 | 5045 if (!must_write_spaces) |
25012 | 5046 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
314 | 5047 olen--; |
5048 } | |
5049 else | |
5050 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5051 /* For an inverse-video line, make sure it's filled with |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5052 spaces all the way to the frame edge so that the reverse |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5053 video extends all the way across. */ |
25012 | 5054 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) |
5055 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 5056 } |
5057 } | |
5058 | |
25012 | 5059 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
5060 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5061 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
5062 | |
5063 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
5064 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
314 | 5065 { |
5066 nlen = 0; | |
5067 goto just_erase; | |
5068 } | |
5069 | |
25012 | 5070 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
5071 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5072 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
5073 | |
5074 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
5075 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
5076 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5077 /* Ignore spaces at the end, if we can. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5078 if (!must_write_spaces) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5079 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5080 --nlen; |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5081 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5082 /* Write the contents of the desired line. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5083 if (nlen) |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5084 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5085 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5086 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5087 } |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5088 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5089 /* Don't call clear_end_of_line if we already wrote the whole |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5090 line. The cursor will not be at the right margin in that |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5091 case but in the line below. */ |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5092 if (nlen < FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5093 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5094 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5095 clear_end_of_line (FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5096 } |
28682
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5097 else |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5098 /* Make sure we are in the right row, otherwise cursor movement |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5099 with cmgoto might use `ch' in the wrong row. */ |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5100 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5101 |
25012 | 5102 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
5103 return; | |
5104 } | |
314 | 5105 |
5106 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
5107 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
25012 | 5108 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 5109 { |
5110 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
25012 | 5111 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
314 | 5112 nlen--; |
5113 } | |
5114 else | |
5115 { | |
25012 | 5116 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
5117 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
5118 all the way across. */ | |
5119 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
5120 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 5121 } |
5122 | |
5123 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
5124 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
5125 { | |
25012 | 5126 int i, j; |
5127 | |
5128 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
5129 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
314 | 5130 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
5131 { | |
25012 | 5132 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
314 | 5133 { |
25012 | 5134 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
5135 j = i + 1; | |
5136 while (j < nlen | |
5137 && (j >= olen | |
5138 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
5139 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
5140 ++j; | |
5141 | |
5142 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
314 | 5143 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
25012 | 5144 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
5145 i = j - 1; | |
314 | 5146 |
5147 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
5148 } | |
5149 } | |
5150 | |
5151 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
5152 if (olen > nlen) | |
5153 { | |
5154 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5155 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5156 } | |
5157 | |
25012 | 5158 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
5159 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
314 | 5160 return; |
5161 } | |
5162 | |
25012 | 5163 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
5164 characters in a row. */ | |
5165 | |
314 | 5166 if (!olen) |
5167 { | |
25012 | 5168 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
5169 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
5170 if (must_write_spaces || desired_row->inverse_p) | |
5171 nsp = 0; | |
5172 else | |
5173 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5174 | |
314 | 5175 if (nlen > nsp) |
5176 { | |
5177 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5178 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
5179 } | |
5180 | |
764 | 5181 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5182 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5183 return; |
5184 } | |
5185 | |
5186 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
25012 | 5187 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
5188 nsp = desired_row->inverse_p ? 0 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5189 | |
5190 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
5191 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
5192 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
314 | 5193 |
5194 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
5195 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
5196 if (!must_write_spaces && osp + begmatch == olen) | |
5197 { | |
5198 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
25012 | 5199 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
5200 ++begmatch; | |
314 | 5201 } |
5202 | |
5203 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
5204 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
25012 | 5205 when the following text does not match. */ |
314 | 5206 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
5207 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5208 | |
5209 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
5210 op1 = obody + olen; | |
5211 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
5212 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
25012 | 5213 while (op1 > op2 |
5214 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
314 | 5215 { |
5216 op1--; | |
5217 np1--; | |
5218 } | |
5219 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
5220 | |
5221 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
5222 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
5223 Is it worth it? */ | |
5224 | |
5225 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
5226 if (endmatch && tem | |
764 | 5227 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
314 | 5228 endmatch = 0; |
5229 | |
5230 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
5231 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
5232 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
5233 Is it worth it? */ | |
5234 | |
5235 if (nsp != osp | |
5236 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
764 | 5237 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
314 | 5238 { |
5239 begmatch = 0; | |
5240 endmatch = 0; | |
5241 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5242 } | |
5243 | |
5244 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
5245 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
5246 | |
5247 if (osp > nsp) | |
5248 { | |
5249 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5250 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
5251 } | |
5252 else if (nsp > osp) | |
5253 { | |
5254 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
5255 and insert earlier in the line, | |
5256 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
5257 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
5258 { | |
5259 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
5260 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
5261 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
5262 } | |
5263 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
25012 | 5264 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
314 | 5265 } |
5266 olen += nsp - osp; | |
5267 | |
5268 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
5269 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
5270 { | |
5271 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
5272 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
5273 { | |
5274 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
5275 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
5276 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
5277 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5278 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
314 | 5279 olen = 0; |
5280 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5281 } | |
5282 else if (nlen > olen) | |
5283 { | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5284 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5285 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5286 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5287 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5288 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5289 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5290 is a padding glyph. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5291 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5292 int del; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5293 |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5294 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
25012 | 5295 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5296 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
25012 | 5297 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5298 del = olen - tem - out; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5299 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5300 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5301 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
314 | 5302 olen = nlen; |
5303 } | |
5304 else if (olen > nlen) | |
5305 { | |
5306 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5307 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
5308 olen = nlen; | |
5309 } | |
5310 } | |
5311 | |
5312 just_erase: | |
5313 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
5314 if (olen > nlen) | |
5315 { | |
5316 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5317 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5318 } | |
5319 | |
764 | 5320 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5321 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5322 } |
25012 | 5323 |
5324 | |
314 | 5325 |
25012 | 5326 /*********************************************************************** |
5327 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
5328 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5329 | |
5330 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
5331 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
5332 boundaries. */ | |
5333 | |
5334 int | |
5335 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
5336 struct window *w; | |
5337 int *x, *y; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5338 { |
25012 | 5339 struct it it; |
5340 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
5341 struct text_pos startp; | |
5342 int left_area_width; | |
5343 | |
5344 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
5345 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
5346 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
5347 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
5348 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
5349 | |
5350 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
5351 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
5352 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
5353 | |
5354 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
5355 *y = it.current_y; | |
5356 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
5357 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
5358 } | |
5359 | |
5360 | |
5361 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
5362 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
5363 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
5364 the string returned. */ | |
5365 | |
5366 Lisp_Object | |
5367 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
5368 struct window *w; | |
5369 int x, y; | |
5370 int *charpos; | |
5371 { | |
5372 struct glyph_row *row; | |
5373 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
5374 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
5375 int x0; | |
5376 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
5377 | |
5378 if (mode_line_p) | |
5379 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
5380 else | |
25546 | 5381 row = MATRIX_HEADER_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 5382 |
5383 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
5384 { |
25012 | 5385 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
5386 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
5387 and bitmap area width. */ | |
5388 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
5389 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
25459
293b78b9ff60
(mode_line_string): Add FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25385
diff
changeset
|
5390 x += FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); |
25012 | 5391 |
5392 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
5393 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
5394 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5395 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5396 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
5397 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
5398 { | |
5399 string = glyph->object; | |
5400 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
5401 break; | |
5402 } | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5403 } |
25012 | 5404 |
5405 return string; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5406 } |
25012 | 5407 |
5408 | |
5409 /*********************************************************************** | |
5410 Changing Frame Sizes | |
5411 ***********************************************************************/ | |
314 | 5412 |
5413 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
25012 | 5414 |
493 | 5415 SIGTYPE |
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
5416 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
25012 | 5417 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
314 | 5418 { |
5419 int width, height; | |
5420 extern int errno; | |
5421 int old_errno = errno; | |
5422 | |
764 | 5423 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
314 | 5424 |
764 | 5425 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
5426 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
314 | 5427 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
764 | 5428 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
314 | 5429 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
5430 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
5431 | |
5432 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5433 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5434 |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5435 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5436 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5437 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
314 | 5438 { |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5439 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1, 0); |
314 | 5440 break; |
5441 } | |
5442 } | |
5443 } | |
5444 | |
5445 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5446 errno = old_errno; | |
5447 } | |
5448 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
5449 | |
5450 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5451 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. SAFE |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5452 non-zero means this function is called from a place where it is |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5453 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
314 | 5454 |
21514 | 5455 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5456 do_pending_window_change (safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5457 int safe; |
314 | 5458 { |
5459 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5460 if (redisplaying_p && !safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5461 return; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5462 |
314 | 5463 while (delayed_size_change) |
5464 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5465 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5466 |
5467 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
5468 | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5469 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5470 { |
25012 | 5471 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5472 |
764 | 5473 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
5474 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
314 | 5475 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5476 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5477 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0, safe); |
314 | 5478 } |
5479 } | |
5480 } | |
5481 | |
5482 | |
764 | 5483 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5484 indicate no change is to take place. |
314 | 5485 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5486 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5487 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5488 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5489 from a signal handler. |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5490 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5491 SAFE non-zero means this function is called from a place where it's |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5492 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5493 |
21514 | 5494 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5495 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5496 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5497 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5498 { |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5499 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5500 |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5501 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5502 { |
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5503 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5504 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5505 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5506 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5507 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5508 pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5509 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5510 else |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5511 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5512 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5513 |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5514 static void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5515 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5516 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5517 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
314 | 5518 { |
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5519 int new_frame_window_width; |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5520 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5521 |
314 | 5522 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5523 if (delay || (redisplaying_p && !safe)) |
314 | 5524 { |
25012 | 5525 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5526 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
314 | 5527 delayed_size_change = 1; |
5528 return; | |
5529 } | |
5530 | |
764 | 5531 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
25012 | 5532 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
5533 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5534 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5535 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5536 if (newheight == 0) |
25012 | 5537 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5538 if (newwidth == 0) |
25012 | 5539 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
5540 | |
5541 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
5542 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
5543 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5544 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5545 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
25012 | 5546 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5547 |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5548 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
25012 | 5549 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
5550 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
314 | 5551 return; |
5552 | |
15078 | 5553 BLOCK_INPUT; |
5554 | |
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5555 #ifdef MSDOS |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5556 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5557 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5558 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5559 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5560 #endif |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5561 |
25012 | 5562 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
314 | 5563 { |
25012 | 5564 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
314 | 5565 { |
25012 | 5566 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
5567 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
5568 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
5569 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
5570 (newheight | |
5571 - 1 | |
5572 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
5573 0); | |
5574 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5575 newheight - 1); |
25012 | 5576 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
314 | 5577 } |
5578 else | |
764 | 5579 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
25012 | 5580 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
5581 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
5582 | |
5583 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5584 FrameRows = newheight; |
314 | 5585 } |
5586 | |
25012 | 5587 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
314 | 5588 { |
25012 | 5589 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
5590 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
5591 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
5592 | |
5593 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
764 | 5594 FrameCols = newwidth; |
25012 | 5595 |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5596 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5597 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->width, newwidth); |
314 | 5598 } |
5599 | |
25012 | 5600 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5601 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
5602 | |
5603 { | |
5604 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
5605 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
5606 | |
5607 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
5608 &text_area_height); | |
5609 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
5610 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
5611 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
5612 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
5613 } | |
5614 | |
5615 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
5616 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
5617 calculate_costs (f); | |
15065 | 5618 |
5619 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5620 |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5621 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5622 |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5623 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
25012 | 5624 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
5625 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5626 |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5627 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
314 | 5628 } |
25012 | 5629 |
5630 | |
314 | 5631 |
25012 | 5632 /*********************************************************************** |
5633 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
5634 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5635 | |
5636 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
5637 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
5638 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
5639 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
5640 (file) | |
5641 Lisp_Object file; | |
5642 { | |
5643 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
5644 termscript = 0; | |
5645 | |
5646 if (! NILP (file)) | |
5647 { | |
5648 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
5649 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
5650 if (termscript == 0) | |
5651 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
5652 } | |
5653 return Qnil; | |
5654 } | |
5655 | |
5656 | |
314 | 5657 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
5658 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
5659 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
5660 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5661 (string) |
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5662 Lisp_Object string; |
314 | 5663 { |
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5664 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5665 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5666 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
314 | 5667 fflush (stdout); |
5668 if (termscript) | |
5669 { | |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5670 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5671 termscript); |
314 | 5672 fflush (termscript); |
5673 } | |
5674 return Qnil; | |
5675 } | |
5676 | |
25012 | 5677 |
314 | 5678 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
5679 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
5680 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
5681 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
5682 (arg) | |
5683 Lisp_Object arg; | |
5684 { | |
493 | 5685 if (!NILP (arg)) |
314 | 5686 { |
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5687 if (noninteractive) |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5688 putchar (07); |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5689 else |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5690 ring_bell (); |
314 | 5691 fflush (stdout); |
5692 } | |
5693 else | |
5694 bitch_at_user (); | |
5695 | |
5696 return Qnil; | |
5697 } | |
5698 | |
21514 | 5699 void |
314 | 5700 bitch_at_user () |
5701 { | |
5702 if (noninteractive) | |
5703 putchar (07); | |
25012 | 5704 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
314 | 5705 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
5706 else | |
5707 ring_bell (); | |
5708 fflush (stdout); | |
5709 } | |
5710 | |
25012 | 5711 |
5712 | |
5713 /*********************************************************************** | |
5714 Sleeping, Waiting | |
5715 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5716 | |
314 | 5717 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5718 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
2648 | 5719 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5720 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5721 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5722 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5723 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5724 (seconds, milliseconds) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5725 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
314 | 5726 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5727 int sec, usec; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5728 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5729 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5730 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5731 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5732 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5733 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5734 | |
5735 { | |
5736 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5737 sec = (int) duration; | |
5738 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5739 } | |
314 | 5740 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5741 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5742 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5743 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5744 #endif |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5745 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5746 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5747 if (usec < 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5748 { |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5749 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5750 if (-1000000 < usec) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5751 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5752 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5753 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5754 } |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5755 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5756 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5757 |
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5758 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
314 | 5759 return Qnil; |
5760 | |
650 | 5761 { |
5762 Lisp_Object zero; | |
5763 | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5764 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
650 | 5765 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
5766 } | |
587 | 5767 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5768 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5769 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5770 #if 0 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5771 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
314 | 5772 immediate_quit = 1; |
5773 QUIT; | |
5774 | |
5775 #ifdef VMS | |
5776 sys_sleep (sec); | |
5777 #else /* not VMS */ | |
5778 /* The reason this is done this way | |
5779 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
5780 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
5781 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
554 | 5782 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
5783 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
587 | 5784 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
554 | 5785 |
314 | 5786 while (1) |
5787 { | |
554 | 5788 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
5789 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
5790 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
5791 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
314 | 5792 break; |
5793 } | |
5794 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5795 sleep (sec); | |
5796 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5797 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
5798 | |
5799 immediate_quit = 0; | |
5800 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
5801 | |
5802 return Qnil; | |
5803 } | |
5804 | |
25012 | 5805 |
650 | 5806 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
5807 it does the redisplay. | |
5808 | |
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5809 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5810 waiting for input as well. */ |
650 | 5811 |
5812 Lisp_Object | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5813 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5814 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
314 | 5815 { |
650 | 5816 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
314 | 5817 |
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5818 swallow_events (display); |
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5819 |
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5820 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
314 | 5821 return Qnil; |
650 | 5822 |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5823 if (initial_display) |
314 | 5824 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
5825 | |
673 | 5826 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
5827 return Qt; | |
5828 | |
314 | 5829 #ifdef SIGIO |
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5830 gobble_input (0); |
650 | 5831 #endif |
5832 | |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5833 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
650 | 5834 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
5835 | |
314 | 5836 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
5837 } | |
5838 | |
25012 | 5839 |
650 | 5840 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5841 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
2648 | 5842 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5843 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5844 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5845 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5846 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5847 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
650 | 5848 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
5849 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
5850 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5851 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5852 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
650 | 5853 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5854 int sec, usec; |
650 | 5855 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5856 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5857 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5858 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5859 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5860 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5861 | |
5862 { | |
5863 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5864 sec = (int) duration; | |
5865 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5866 } | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5867 |
650 | 5868 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5869 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5870 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
650 | 5871 #endif |
5872 | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5873 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
650 | 5874 } |
25012 | 5875 |
5876 | |
314 | 5877 |
25012 | 5878 /*********************************************************************** |
5879 Other Lisp Functions | |
5880 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5881 | |
5882 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
5883 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
5884 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
5885 add length checks). */ | |
5886 | |
5887 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
5888 | |
5889 | |
5890 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
5891 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
5892 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
5893 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
5894 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
5895 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
5896 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
5897 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
5898 the current state.\n") | |
5899 () | |
5900 { | |
5901 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
5902 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
5903 int n; | |
5904 | |
5905 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5906 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5907 { | |
5908 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
5909 goto changed; | |
5910 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
5911 goto changed; | |
5912 } | |
5913 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
5914 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
5915 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
5916 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5917 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5918 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5919 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5920 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5921 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5922 continue; | |
5923 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
5924 goto changed; | |
5925 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
5926 goto changed; | |
5927 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
5928 goto changed; | |
5929 } | |
5930 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
5931 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
5932 return Qnil; | |
5933 changed: | |
5934 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
5935 n = 1; | |
5936 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5937 n += 2; | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5938 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5939 n += 3; |
5940 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
5941 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
5942 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
5943 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
5944 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
5945 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5946 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5947 { | |
5948 *vecp++ = frame; | |
5949 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
5950 } | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5951 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5952 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5953 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5954 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5955 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5956 continue; | |
5957 *vecp++ = buf; | |
5958 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
5959 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
5960 } | |
5961 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
5962 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5963 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5964 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5965 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5966 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
5967 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5968 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5969 abort (); | |
5970 return Qt; | |
5971 } | |
5972 | |
5973 | |
5974 | |
5975 /*********************************************************************** | |
5976 Initialization | |
5977 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5978 | |
314 | 5979 char *terminal_type; |
5980 | |
25012 | 5981 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
5982 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
5983 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
314 | 5984 |
21514 | 5985 void |
314 | 5986 init_display () |
5987 { | |
5988 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
5989 extern int display_arg; | |
5990 #endif | |
5991 | |
25012 | 5992 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
5993 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
5994 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
5995 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
5996 | |
314 | 5997 meta_key = 0; |
5998 inverse_video = 0; | |
5999 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
6000 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
6001 | |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6002 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6003 during startup. */ |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6004 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
314 | 6005 |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6006 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6007 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6008 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6009 using the window system. |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6010 |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6011 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6012 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
314 | 6013 |
6014 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6015 if (! display_arg) |
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6016 { |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6017 char *display; |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6018 #ifdef VMS |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6019 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6020 #else |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6021 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6022 #endif |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6023 |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6024 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
2364 | 6025 } |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6026 |
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6027 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6028 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6029 && initialized |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6030 #endif |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6031 ) |
314 | 6032 { |
6033 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
6034 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
6035 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
6036 #else | |
6037 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
6038 #endif | |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6039 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6040 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
15282 | 6041 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6042 So call tgetent. */ |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6043 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6044 #endif |
25012 | 6045 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
314 | 6046 return; |
6047 } | |
6048 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
6049 | |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6050 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6051 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6052 { |
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
6053 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6054 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
25012 | 6055 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6056 return; |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6057 } |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6058 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6059 |
314 | 6060 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
6061 if (! isatty (0)) | |
6062 { | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
6063 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
314 | 6064 exit (1); |
6065 } | |
6066 | |
6067 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
6068 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
6069 if (!terminal_type) | |
6070 { | |
6071 #ifdef VMS | |
6072 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
6073 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
6074 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
6075 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
6076 #else | |
6077 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
6078 #endif | |
6079 exit (1); | |
6080 } | |
6081 | |
6082 #ifdef VMS | |
25012 | 6083 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
314 | 6084 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
6085 { | |
6086 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
6087 char *p; | |
6088 | |
6089 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
6090 | |
6091 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
6092 if (isupper (*p)) | |
6093 *p = tolower (*p); | |
6094 | |
6095 terminal_type = new; | |
6096 } | |
25012 | 6097 #endif /* VMS */ |
314 | 6098 |
6099 term_init (terminal_type); | |
25012 | 6100 |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6101 { |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6102 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6103 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6104 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6105 |
25012 | 6106 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
6107 | |
6108 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
6109 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
6110 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
6111 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6112 } |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6113 |
25012 | 6114 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6115 calculate_costs (XFRAME (selected_frame)); |
314 | 6116 |
6117 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
6118 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6119 if (initialized) | |
6120 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
6121 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
6122 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
25012 | 6123 |
6124 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
6125 if (initialized | |
6126 && !noninteractive | |
25118
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6127 #ifdef MSDOS |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6128 /* The MSDOS terminal turns on its ``window system'' relatively |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6129 late into the startup, so we cannot do the frame faces' |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6130 initialization just yet. It will be done later by pc-win.el |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6131 and internal_terminal_init. */ |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6132 && (strcmp (terminal_type, "internal") != 0 || inhibit_window_system) |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6133 #endif |
25012 | 6134 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6135 { |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6136 /* For the initial frame, we don't have any way of knowing what |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6137 are the foreground and background colors of the terminal. */ |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6138 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME(); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6139 |
26902
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6140 FRAME_FOREGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_FG_COLOR; |
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6141 FRAME_BACKGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_BG_COLOR; |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6142 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6143 } |
314 | 6144 } |
25012 | 6145 |
6146 | |
314 | 6147 |
25012 | 6148 /*********************************************************************** |
6149 Blinking cursor | |
6150 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6151 | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6152 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor", Finternal_show_cursor, |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6153 Sinternal_show_cursor, 2, 2, 0, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6154 "Set the cursor-visibility flag of WINDOW to SHOW.\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6155 WINDOW nil means use the selected window. SHOW non-nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6156 show a cursor in WINDOW in the next redisplay. SHOW nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6157 don't show a cursor.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6158 (window, show) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6159 Lisp_Object window, show; |
25012 | 6160 { |
6161 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
6162 output routines. */ | |
6163 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
6164 { | |
6165 if (NILP (window)) | |
6166 window = selected_window; | |
6167 else | |
6168 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
6169 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6170 XWINDOW (window)->cursor_off_p = NILP (show); |
25012 | 6171 } |
6172 | |
6173 return Qnil; | |
6174 } | |
6175 | |
6176 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6177 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor-p", Finternal_show_cursor_p, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6178 Sinternal_show_cursor_p, 0, 1, 0, |
26499
10af169a628b
(Finternal_show_cursor_p): Fix doc string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26334
diff
changeset
|
6179 "Value is non-nil if next redisplay will display a cursor in WINDOW.\n\ |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6180 WINDOW nil or omitted means report on the selected window.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6181 (window) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6182 Lisp_Object window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6183 { |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6184 struct window *w; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6185 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6186 if (NILP (window)) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6187 window = selected_window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6188 else |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6189 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6190 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6191 w = XWINDOW (window); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6192 return w->cursor_off_p ? Qnil : Qt; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6193 } |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6194 |
25012 | 6195 |
6196 /*********************************************************************** | |
6197 Initialization | |
6198 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6199 | |
21514 | 6200 void |
314 | 6201 syms_of_display () |
6202 { | |
764 | 6203 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
314 | 6204 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6205 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
314 | 6206 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
6207 defsubr (&Sding); | |
6208 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
6209 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
6210 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6211 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor); |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6212 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor_p); |
314 | 6213 |
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
6214 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6215 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6216 |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6217 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6218 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6219 |
314 | 6220 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
6221 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
314 | 6222 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
6223 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
25012 | 6224 |
314 | 6225 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
764 | 6226 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
314 | 6227 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
25012 | 6228 |
314 | 6229 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
764 | 6230 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
25012 | 6231 |
314 | 6232 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
764 | 6233 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
314 | 6234 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
764 | 6235 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
314 | 6236 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
25012 | 6237 |
314 | 6238 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
6239 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
6240 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
25012 | 6241 |
314 | 6242 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
6243 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
6244 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
25012 | 6245 |
314 | 6246 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
6247 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
25012 | 6248 |
314 | 6249 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
764 | 6250 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
314 | 6251 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
6252 Each element can be:\n\ | |
6253 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
6254 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
6255 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
6857 | 6256 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
314 | 6257 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
6258 | |
6259 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
6260 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
6261 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
6262 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
6263 | |
25012 | 6264 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
6265 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
6266 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
6267 | |
314 | 6268 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
6269 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6270 if (noninteractive) | |
6271 #endif | |
6272 { | |
6273 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
6274 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
6275 } | |
6276 } |